From c41e74eb5330ba759ef001e32e6652e630ac5a92 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Mon, 30 Sep 2019 21:49:03 +0000 Subject: beamer (30sep19) git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@52222 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md | 16 +- .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.pdf | Bin 148813 -> 148816 bytes .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex | 744 --------------------- .../doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex | 53 -- .../beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.pdf | Bin 353423 -> 353427 bytes .../beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex | 13 - .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex | 587 ---------------- .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf | Bin 32823 -> 0 bytes .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg | Bin 36833 -> 0 bytes .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg | Bin 4290 -> 0 bytes .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg | Bin 40020 -> 0 bytes .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg | Bin 27790 -> 0 bytes .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg | Bin 49011 -> 0 bytes .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg | Bin 27779 -> 0 bytes .../beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.pdf | Bin 324225 -> 324218 bytes .../beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex | 14 - .../latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex | 233 ------- .../doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex | 80 --- .../doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex | 331 --------- .../doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex | 271 -------- .../doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex | 14 +- .../doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex | 2 +- .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex | 2 +- .../doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex | 2 +- .../doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex | 2 + .../doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.pdf | Bin 1601872 -> 1603631 bytes .../doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex | 2 +- .../latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex | 293 -------- .../latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex | 285 -------- .../latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex | 297 -------- .../emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex | 53 ++ .../emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex | 80 +++ .../emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex | 331 +++++++++ .../emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex | 271 ++++++++ .../beamerexample-conference-talk.tex | 744 +++++++++++++++++++++ .../beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex | 13 + .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex | 587 ++++++++++++++++ .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf | Bin 0 -> 32823 bytes .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg | Bin 0 -> 36833 bytes .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg | Bin 0 -> 4290 bytes .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg | Bin 0 -> 40020 bytes .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg | Bin 0 -> 27790 bytes .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg | Bin 0 -> 49011 bytes .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg | Bin 0 -> 27779 bytes .../beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex | 14 + .../a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex | 233 +++++++ Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt | 451 ------------- .../latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex | 226 ------- .../latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex | 216 ------ .../latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex | 221 ------ Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt | 339 ---------- .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt | 451 +++++++++++++ .../doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt | 339 ++++++++++ .../doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt | 416 ++++++++++++ .../doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt | 163 +++++ .../beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt | 92 +++ Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt | 416 ------------ .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt | 163 ----- .../doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt | 92 --- .../conference-ornate-20min.de.tex | 293 ++++++++ .../conference-ornate-20min.en.tex | 285 ++++++++ .../conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex | 297 ++++++++ .../generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex | 226 +++++++ .../generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex | 216 ++++++ .../generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex | 221 ++++++ .../speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex | 106 +++ .../speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex | 102 +++ .../speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex | 102 +++ .../beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex | 106 --- .../beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex | 102 --- .../beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex | 102 --- Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls | 2 +- .../texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty | 2 +- .../tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty | 1 + .../tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty | 4 +- .../tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty | 2 +- .../tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty | 74 +- 77 files changed, 5744 insertions(+), 5651 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex delete mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md index d18dfe19aab..7d5020ab7b8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md @@ -8,6 +8,17 @@ a major and minor version only. ## [Unreleased] +## [v3.57] + +### Changed + +- More patch for `paralist` package (see #539) + +### Fixed + +- Replace `\mode` with `\only` (see #543) +- Reset the width of color box in case of change in `\hsize` + ## [v3.56] ### Changed @@ -70,9 +81,10 @@ a major and minor version only. - Support for `noxcolor` with `beamerarticle` (see #483) - Treatment of mixed overlay/alert specifications -[Unreleased]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.56...HEAD +[Unreleased]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.57...HEAD +[v3.57]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.56...v3.57 +[v3.56]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.55...v3.56 [v3.55]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.54...v3.55 -[v3.55]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.55...v3.56 [v3.54]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.53...v3.54 [v3.53]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.52...v3.53 [v3.52]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.51...v3.52 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.pdf index ae559eef438..ab417b45787 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex deleted file mode 100644 index f5faef720e9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,744 +0,0 @@ -% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified -% -% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or -% 2. under the GNU Public License. -% -% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. - - - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% -% DO NOT USE THIS FILE AS A TEMPLATE FOR YOUR OWN TALKS¡!! -% -% Use a file in the directory solutions instead. -% They are much better suited. -% - - -% Setup appearance: - -\usetheme{Darmstadt} -\usefonttheme[onlylarge]{structurebold} -\setbeamerfont*{frametitle}{size=\normalsize,series=\bfseries} -\setbeamertemplate{navigation symbols}{} - - -% Standard packages - -\usepackage[english]{babel} -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} - - -% Setup TikZ - -\usepackage{tikz} -\usetikzlibrary{arrows} -\tikzstyle{block}=[draw opacity=0.7,line width=1.4cm] - - -% Author, Title, etc. - -\title[Block Partitioning and Perfect Phylogenies] -{% - On the Complexity of SNP Block Partitioning Under the Perfect - Phylogeny Model% -} - -\author[Gramm, Hartman, Nierhoff, Sharan, Tantau] -{ - Jens~Gramm\inst{1} \and - Tzvika~Hartman\inst{2} \and - Till~Nierhoff\inst{3} \and - Roded~Sharan\inst{4} \and - \textcolor{green!50!black}{Till~Tantau}\inst{5} -} - -\institute[Tübingen and others] -{ - \inst{1}% - Universität Tübingen, Germany - \and - \vskip-2mm - \inst{2}% - Bar-Ilan University, Ramat-Gan, Israel - \and - \vskip-2mm - \inst{3}% - International Computer Science Institute, Berkeley, USA - \and - \vskip-2mm - \inst{4}% - Tel-Aviv University, Israel - \and - \vskip-2mm - \inst{5}% - Universität zu Lübeck, Germany -} - -\date[WABI 2006] -{Workshop on Algorithms in Bioinformatics, 2006} - - - -% The main document - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame} - \titlepage -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Outline} - \tableofcontents -\end{frame} - - -\section{Introduction} - -\subsection{The Model and the Problem} - -\begin{frame}{What is haplotyping and why is it important?} - You hopefully know this after the previous three talks\dots -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}[t]{General formalization of haplotyping.} - \begin{block}{Inputs} - \begin{itemize} - \item A \alert{genotype matrix} $G$. - \item The \alert{rows} of the matrix are \alert{taxa / individuals}. - \item The \alert{columns} of the matrix are \alert{SNP sites / - characters}. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} - \begin{block}{Outputs} - \begin{itemize} - \item A \alert{haplotype matrix} $H$. - \item Pairs of rows in $H$ \alert{explain} the rows of $G$. - \item The haplotypes in $H$ are \alert{biologically plausible}. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}[t]{Our formalization of haplotyping.} - \begin{block}{Inputs} - \begin{itemize} - \item A genotype matrix $G$. - \item The rows of the matrix are individuals / taxa. - \item The columns of the matrix are SNP sites / characters. - \item - The problem is directed: one haplotype is known. - \item - The input is biallelic: there are only two homozygous - states (0 and 1) and one heterozygous state (2). - \end{itemize} - \end{block} - \begin{block}{Outputs} - \begin{itemize} - \item A haplotype matrix $H$. - \item Pairs of rows in $H$ explain the rows of $G$. - \item The haplotypes in $H$ form a perfect phylogeny. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{We can do perfect phylogeny haplotyping efficiently, but - \dots} - \begin{enumerate} - \item \alert{Data may be missing.} - \begin{itemize} - \item This makes the problem NP-complete \dots - \item \dots even for very restricted cases. - \end{itemize} - \textcolor{green!50!black}{Solutions:} - \begin{itemize} - \item Additional assumption like the rich data hypothesis. - \end{itemize} - \item \alert{No perfect phylogeny is possible.} - \begin{itemize} - \item This can be caused by chromosomal crossing-over effects. - \item This can be caused by incorrect data. - \item This can be caused by multiple mutations at the same sites. - \end{itemize} - \textcolor{green!50!black}{Solutions:} - \begin{itemize} - \item Look for phylogenetic networks. - \item Correct data. - \item - Find blocks where a perfect phylogeny is possible. - \end{itemize} - \end{enumerate} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{The Integrated Approach} - -\begin{frame}{How blocks help in perfect phylogeny haplotyping.} - \begin{enumerate} - \item Partition the site set into overlapping contiguous blocks. - \item Compute a perfect phylogeny for each block and combine them. - \item Use dynamic programming for finding the partition. - \end{enumerate} - - \begin{tikzpicture} - \useasboundingbox (0,-1) rectangle (10,2); - - \draw[line width=2mm,dash pattern=on 1mm off 1mm] - (0,1) -- (9.99,1) node[midway,above] {Genotype matrix} - (0,0.6666) -- (9.99,0.6666) - (0,0.3333) -- (9.99,0.3333) - (0,0) -- (9.99,0) node[midway,below] {\only<1>{no perfect phylogeny}}; - - \begin{scope}[xshift=-.5mm] - \only<2-> - { - \draw[red,block] (0,.5) -- (3,.5) - node[midway,below] {perfect phylogeny}; - } - - \only<3-> - { - \draw[green!50!black,block] (2.5,.5) -- (7,.5) - node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny}; - } - - \only<4-> - { - \draw[blue,block] (6.5,.5) -- (10,.5) - node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny}; - } - \end{scope} - \end{tikzpicture} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Objective of the integrated approach.} - \begin{enumerate} - \item Partition the site set into \alert{noncontiguous} blocks. - \item Compute a perfect phylogeny for each block and combine them. - \item Compute partition while computing perfect - phylogenies. - \end{enumerate} - - \begin{tikzpicture} - \useasboundingbox (0,-1) rectangle (10,2); - - \draw[line width=2mm,dash pattern=on 1mm off 1mm] - (0,1) -- (9.99,1) node[midway,above] {Genotype matrix} - (0,0.6666) -- (9.99,0.6666) - (0,0.3333) -- (9.99,0.3333) - (0,0) -- (9.99,0) node[midway,below] {\only<1>{no perfect phylogeny}}; - - \only<2-> - { - \begin{scope}[xshift=-0.5mm] - \draw[red,block] (0,.5) -- (3,.5) - node[midway,below] {perfect phylogeny} - (8,.5) -- (9,.5); - - \draw[green!50!black,block] - (3,.5) -- (6,.5) - node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny} - (6.4,.5) -- (8,.5) - (9,.5) -- (10,.5); - - \draw[blue,block] (6,.5) -- (6.4,.5) - node[midway,below=5mm] {perfect phylogeny}; - \end{scope} - } - \end{tikzpicture} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{The formal computational problem.} - We are interested in the computational complexity of \\ - \alert{the function \alert{$\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}$}}: - \begin{itemize} - \item It gets genotype matrices as input. - \item It maps them to a number $k$. - \item This number is minimal such that the sites can be - covered by $k$ sets, each admitting a perfect phylogeny. - \\ - (We call this a \alert{pp-partition}.) - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\section{Bad News: Hardness Results} - -\subsection{Hardness of PP-Partitioning of Haplotype Matrices} - -\begin{frame}{Finding pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.} - We start with a special case: - \begin{itemize} - \item The inputs $M$ are \alert{already haplotype matrices}. - \item The inputs $M$ \alert{do not allow a perfect phylogeny}. - \item What is $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M)$? - \end{itemize} - \begin{example} - \begin{columns} - \column{.3\textwidth} - $M\colon$ - \footnotesize - \begin{tabular}{cccc} - 0 & 0 & 0 & 1 \\ - 0 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\ - 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\ - 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 1 & 0 & 1 \\ - 1 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 0 & 1 & 0 \\ - 1 & 0 & 1 & 0 - \end{tabular}% - \only<2> - {% - \begin{tikzpicture} - \useasboundingbox (2.9,0); - - \draw [red, opacity=0.7,line width=1cm] (1.7 ,1.9) -- (1.7 ,-1.7); - \draw [blue,opacity=0.7,line width=5mm] (0.85,1.9) -- (0.85,-1.7) - (2.55,1.9) -- (2.55,-1.7); - \end{tikzpicture} - } - \column{.6\textwidth} - \begin{overprint} - \onslide<1> - No perfect phylogeny is possible. - - \onslide<2> - \textcolor{blue!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny} - - \textcolor{red!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny} - - $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$. - - \end{overprint} - \end{columns} - \end{example} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Bad news about pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.} - \begin{theorem} - Finding \alert{optimal pp-partition of haplotype matrices}\\ - is equivalent to finding \alert{optimal graph colorings}. - \end{theorem} - - \begin{proof}[Proof sketch for first direction] - \begin{enumerate} - \item Let $G$ be a graph. - \item Build a matrix with a column for each vertex of $G$. - \item For each edge of $G$ add four rows inducing\\the - submatrix $\left( - \begin{smallmatrix} - 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 1 \\ - 1 & 0 \\ - 1 & 1 - \end{smallmatrix}\right)$. - \item The submatrix enforces that the columns lie in different - perfect phylogenies. \qedhere - \end{enumerate} - \end{proof} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Implications for pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.} - \begin{corollary} - If $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$ for a haplotype matrix $M$, - we can find an optimal pp-partition in polynomial time. - \end{corollary} - - \begin{corollary} - Computing $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}$ for haplotype matrices is - \begin{itemize} - \item $\operatorname{NP}$-hard, - \item not fixed-parameter tractable, unless - $\operatorname{P}=\operatorname{NP}$, - \item very hard to approximate. - \end{itemize} - \end{corollary} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Hardness of PP-Partitioning of Genotype Matrices} - - -\begin{frame}{Finding pp-partitions of genotype matrices.} - Now comes the general case: - \begin{itemize} - \item The inputs $M$ are \alert{genotype matrices}. - \item The inputs $M$ \alert{do not allow a perfect phylogeny}. - \item What is $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M)$? - \end{itemize} - \begin{example} - \begin{columns} - \column{.3\textwidth} - $M\colon$ - \footnotesize - \begin{tabular}{cccc} - 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 \\ - 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 0 & 0 & 1 \\ - 0 & 0 & 1 & 0 \\ - 0 & 2 & 2 & 0 \\ - 1 & 1 & 0 & 0 - \end{tabular}% - \only<2> - {% - \begin{tikzpicture} - \useasboundingbox (2.9,0); - - \draw [red, opacity=0.7,line width=1cm] (1.7 ,1.3) -- (1.7 ,-1.1); - \draw [blue,opacity=0.7,line width=5mm] (0.85,1.3) -- (0.85,-1.1) - (2.55,1.3) -- (2.55,-1.1); - \end{tikzpicture} - } - \column{.6\textwidth} - \begin{overprint} - \onslide<1> - No perfect phylogeny is possible. - - \onslide<2> - \textcolor{blue!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny} - - \textcolor{red!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny} - - $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$. - - \end{overprint} - \end{columns} - \end{example} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{Bad news about pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.} - \begin{theorem} - Finding \alert{optimal pp-partition of genotype matrices} - is at least as hard as finding \alert{optimal colorings of - 3-uniform hypergraphs}. - \end{theorem} - - \begin{proof}[Proof sketch] - \begin{enumerate} - \item Let $G$ be a 3-uniform hypergraph. - \item Build a matrix with a column for each vertex of $G$. - \item For each hyperedge of $G$ add four rows inducing\\ the submatrix - $\left( - \begin{smallmatrix} - 2 & 2 & 2 \\ - 1 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 1 & 0 \\ - 0 & 0 & 1 - \end{smallmatrix}\right) - $. - \item The submatrix enforces that the three columns do not all lie - in the same perfect phylogeny. \qedhere - \end{enumerate} - \end{proof} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Implications for pp-partitions of genotype matrices.} - \begin{corollary} - Even if we know $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$ for a genotype matrix $M$,\\ - finding a pp-partition of any fixed size is still - \begin{itemize} - \item $\operatorname{NP}$-hard, - \item not fixed-parameter tractable, unless - $\operatorname{P}=\operatorname{NP}$, - \item very hard to approximate. - \end{itemize} - \end{corollary} -\end{frame} - - -\section{Good News: Tractability Results} - -\subsection{Perfect Path Phylogenies} - -\begin{frame}{Automatic optimal pp-partitioning is hopeless, but\dots} - \begin{itemize} - \item The hardness results are \alert{worst-case} results for\\ - \alert{highly artificial inputs}. - \item \alert{Real biological data} might have special properties - that make the problem \alert{tractable}. - \item One such property is that perfect phylogenies are often - perfect \alert{path} phylogenies: - - In HapMap data, in 70\% of the blocks where a perfect phylogeny - is possible a perfect path phylogeny is also possible. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{Example of a perfect path phylogeny.} - \begin{columns}[t] - \column{.3\textwidth} - \begin{exampleblock}{Genotype matrix} - $G\colon$ - \begin{tabular}{ccc} - A & B & C \\\hline - 2 & 2 & 2 \\ - 0 & 2 & 0 \\ - 2 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 2 & 2 - \end{tabular} - \end{exampleblock} - - \column{.3\textwidth} - \begin{exampleblock}{Haplotype matrix} - $H\colon$ - \begin{tabular}{ccc} - A & B & C \\\hline - 1 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 1 & 1 \\ - 0 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 1 & 0 \\ - 0 & 0 & 0 \\ - 1 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 0 & 0 \\ - 0 & 1 & 1 - \end{tabular} - \end{exampleblock} - - \column{.4\textwidth} - \begin{exampleblock}{Perfect path phylogeny} - \begin{center} - \begin{tikzpicture}[auto,thick] - \tikzstyle{node}=% - [% - minimum size=10pt,% - inner sep=0pt,% - outer sep=0pt,% - ball color=example text.fg,% - circle% - ] - - \node [node] {} [->] - child {node [node] {} edge from parent node[swap]{A}} - child {node [node] {} - child {node [node] {} edge from parent node{C}} - edge from parent node{B} - }; - \end{tikzpicture} - \end{center} - \end{exampleblock} - \end{columns} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{The modified formal computational problem.} - We are interested in the computational complexity of \\ - the function $\chi_{\alert{\operatorname{PPP}}}$: - \begin{itemize} - \item It gets genotype matrices as input. - \item It maps them to a number $k$. - \item This number is minimal such that the sites can be - covered by $k$ sets, each admitting a perfect \alert{path} phylogeny. - \\ - (We call this a ppp-partition.) - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - - -\subsection{Tractability of PPP-Partitioning of Genotype Matrices} - -\begin{frame}{Good news about ppp-partitions of genotype matrices.} - \begin{theorem} - \alert{Optimal ppp-partitions of genotype matrices} can be - computed in \alert{polynomial time}. - \end{theorem} - \begin{block}{Algorithm} - \begin{enumerate} - \item Build the following partial order: - \begin{itemize} - \item Can one column be above the other in a phylogeny? - \item Can the columns be the two children of the root of a - perfect path phylogeny? - \end{itemize} - \item Cover the partial order with as few compatible chain pairs - as possible. - - For this, a maximal matching in a special graph needs to be - computed. - \end{enumerate} - \end{block} - \hyperlink{algorithm<1>}{\beamergotobutton{The algorithm in action}} - \hypertarget{return}{} -\end{frame} - -\section*{Summary} - -\begin{frame} - \frametitle{Summary} - - \begin{itemize} - \item - Finding optimal pp-partitions is \alert{intractable}. - \item - It is even intractable to find a pp-partition when \alert{just two - noncontiguous blocks are known to suffice}. - \item - For perfect \alert{path} phylogenies, optimal partitions can be - computed \alert{in polynomial time}. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\appendix - -\section*{Appendix} - -\begin{frame}[label=algorithm]{The algorithm in action.}{Computation of - the partial order.} - \begin{columns}[t] - \column{.4\textwidth} - \begin{exampleblock}{Genotype matrix} - $G\colon$ - \begin{tabular}{ccccc} - A & B & C & D & E \\\hline - 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 \\ - 0 & 1 & 2 & 1 & 0 \\ - 1 & 0 & 0 & 1 & 2 \\ - 0 & 2 & 2 & 0 & 0 - \end{tabular} - \end{exampleblock} - \column{.6\textwidth} - \begin{exampleblock}{Partial order} - \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm] - \tikzstyle{every node}= - [% - fill=green!50!black!20,% - draw=green!50!black,% - minimum size=7mm,% - circle,% - thick% - ] - - \node (A) {A}; - \node (B) [right of=A] {B}; - \node (C) [below of=B] {C}; - \node (D) [above of=A] {D}; - \node (E) [below of=A] {E}; - - \path [thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth'] (A) edge (E) - (B) edge (C) - (D) edge (A) - edge[bend right] (E); - - \uncover<2>{ - \path [-,blue,thick](A) edge (B) - edge (C) - (B) edge (E) - (C) edge (E);} - \end{tikzpicture} - - Partial order: \tikz[baseline] \draw[thick,-stealth'] (0pt,.5ex) - -- (5mm,.5ex); - - \uncover<2>{\textcolor{blue}{Compatible as children of root: - \tikz[baseline] \draw[thick] (0pt,.5ex) -- (5mm,.5ex);}} - \end{exampleblock} - \end{columns} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{The algorithm in action.}{The matching in the special graph.} - \begin{columns}[t] - \column{.3\textwidth} - \begin{exampleblock}{Partial order} - \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm] - \tikzstyle{every node}=% - [% - fill=green!50!black!20,% - draw=green!50!black,% - minimum size=8mm,% - circle,% - thick% - ] - - \node (A) {$A$}; - \node (B) [right of=A] {$B$}; - \node (C) [below of=B] {$C$}; - \node (D) [above of=A] {$D$}; - \node (E) [below of=A] {$E$}; - - \path [thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth'] (A) edge (E) - (B) edge (C) - (D) edge (A) - edge[bend right] (E); - - \path [-,blue,thick](A) edge (B) - edge (C) - (B) edge (E) - (C) edge (E); - - \only<3-> - { - \path[very thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth',red] (D) edge (A) (B) edge (C); - \path [-,red,very thick](E) edge (B); - } - \end{tikzpicture} - \end{exampleblock} - \column{.7\textwidth} - \begin{exampleblock}{Matching graph} - \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm] - \tikzstyle{every node}=% - [% - fill=green!50!black!20,% - draw=green!50!black,% - minimum size=8mm,% - circle,% - thick,% - inner sep=0pt% - ] - - \node (A) {$A$}; - \node (B) [right of=A] {$B$}; - \node (C) [below of=B] {$C$}; - \node (D) [above of=A] {$D$}; - \node (E) [below of=A] {$E$}; - - \begin{scope}[xshift=4.75cm] - \node (A') {$A'$}; - \node (B') [right of=A'] {$B'$}; - \node (C') [below of=B'] {$C'$}; - \node (D') [above of=A'] {$D'$}; - \node (E') [below of=A'] {$E'$}; - \end{scope} - - \path [thick] (A) edge (E') - (B) edge (C') - (D) edge (A') - edge (E'); - - \path [blue,thick](A') edge (B') - edge (C') - (B') edge (E') - (C') edge (E'); - - \only<2-> - { - \path[very thick,red] (D) edge (A') - (B) edge (C') - (B') edge (E'); - } - \end{tikzpicture} - \end{exampleblock} - \end{columns} - - \medskip - \uncover<2->{A \alert{maximal matching} in the matching graph - \uncover<3>{induces\\ \alert{perfect path phylogenies}.}} - - \hfill\hyperlink{return}{\beamerreturnbutton{Return}} -\end{frame} - -\end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 8c208c75032..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified -% -% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or -% 2. under the GNU Public License. -% -% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. - -% $Header$ - -% This file is a demonstration on how a foils file should be -% changed to make it work with beamer. - -% Copyright notice: - -% Since foiltex has a restricted license, I'm not able to include an -% original example from foiltex. Instead, I'm providing a simple -% example that shows the basic usage. - - -\documentclass{beamer} -\usepackage{beamerfoils} -\beamertemplatetheoremsnumbered - -\title{A Foils-To-Beamer Example} - -\author{Till Tantau} - -\MyLogo{\tiny-- Typeset by beamer emulation of \FoilTeX\ --} - -\leftheader{Till Tantau} - -\begin{document} - -\frame{ -\maketitle -} - -\foilhead{A first frame} - -Some text. - -\pagebreak - -More text on next slide. - -\foilhead{A third frame} - -Some text. - -\endfoil -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.pdf index c0a13a7eb79..4bf5fa4cbdd 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex deleted file mode 100644 index dbda07c3ab7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified -% -% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or -% 2. under the GNU Public License. -% -% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. - -\documentclass[german,10pt]{beamer} - -\input{beamerexample-lecture-style.tex} -\input{beamerexample-lecture-body.tex} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 5d472951be4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,587 +0,0 @@ -% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified -% -% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or -% 2. under the GNU Public License. -% -% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. - -% -% DO NOT USE THIS FILE AS A TEMPLATE FOR YOUR OWN TALKS¡!! -% -% Use a file in the directory solutions instead. -% They are much better suited. -% - - -\lecture[1]{Syntax versus Semantik}{lecture-text} - -\subtitle{Text und seine Bedeutung} - -\date{27. Oktober 2006} - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame} - \maketitle -\end{frame} - - -\section*{Ziele und Inhalt} - -\begin{frame}{Die Lernziele der heutigen Vorlesung und der Übungen.} - \begin{enumerate} - \item Die Begriffe Syntax und Semantik erklären können - \item Syntaktische und semantische Elemente natürlicher Sprachen und - von Programmiersprachen benennen können - \item Die Begriffe Alphabet und Wort kennen - \item Objekte als Worte kodieren können - \end{enumerate} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}\frametitle{Gliederung} - \tableofcontents -\end{frame} - - -\section{Was ist Syntax?} - -\begin{frame}{Die zwei Hauptbegriffe der heutigen Vorlesung.} - \begin{block}{Grobe Definition (Syntax)} - Unter einer \alert{Syntax} verstehen wir \alert{Regeln}, nach denen - Texte \alert{strukturiert} werden dürfen. - \end{block} - \begin{block}{Grobe Definition (Semantik)} - Unter einer \alert{Semantik} verstehen wir die Zuordnung von - \alert{Bedeutung} zu Text. - \end{block} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection[Syntax \protect\\ natürlicher Sprachen]{Syntax natürlicher Sprachen} - -\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem ägyptischen Text.} - \includegraphicscopyright[width=6cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg} - {Copyright by Guillaume Blanchard, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resultion} - - \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} - \begin{itemize} - \item Wir haben keine Ahnung, was der Text bedeutet. - \item Es gibt aber \alert{Regeln}, die offenbar eingehalten wurden, - wie »Hieroglyphen stehen in Zeilen«. - \item Solche Regeln sind \alert{syntaktische Regeln} -- man kann sie - überprüfen, ohne den Inhalt zu verstehen. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem kyrillischen Text.} - - \includegraphicscopyright[width=6.75cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg} - {Copyright by Cristian Chirita, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resultion} - - \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} - \begin{itemize} - \item Wir haben keine Ahnung, was der Text bedeutet. - \item Es gibt aber \alert{Regeln}, die offenbar eingehalten wurden. - \item Wir kennen mehr Regeln als bei den Hieroglyphen. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} - - \begin{block}{Zur Diskussion} - Welche syntaktischen Regeln fallen Ihnen ein, die bei dem Text - eingehalten wurden? - \end{block} -\end{frame} - - - -\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem deutschen Text.} - \begin{quotation} - Informatiker lieben Logiker. - \end{quotation} - - \bigskip - \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} - \begin{itemize} - \item Auch hier werden viele syntaktische Regeln eingehalten. - \item Es fällt uns aber \alert{schwerer}, diese zu erkennen. - \item Der Grund ist, dass wir \alert{sofort über die Bedeutung - nachdenken}. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von natürlichen Sprachen.} - \begin{itemize} - \item - Die \alert{Syntax} einer natürlichen Sprache ist die Menge an - \alert{Regeln}, nach denen Sätze gebildet werden dürfen. - \item - Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der gebildeten Sätze - ist dabei unerheblich. - \item - Jede Sprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax verschiedener - Sprachen ähneln sich aber oft. - \item - Es ist nicht immer klar, ob eine Regel noch zur Syntax gehört - oder ob es schon um den Sinn geht. - - \ExampleInline{Substantive werden groß geschrieben.} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\subsection{Syntax von Programmiersprachen} - -\begin{frame}[fragile]{Beobachtungen zu einem Programmtext.} - -\begin{verbatim} -\def\pgfpointadd#1#2{% - \pgf@process{#1}% - \pgf@xa=\pgf@x% - \pgf@ya=\pgf@y% - \pgf@process{#2}% - \advance\pgf@x by\pgf@xa% - \advance\pgf@y by\pgf@ya} -\end{verbatim} - \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} - \begin{itemize} - \item Der Programmtext sieht sehr kryptisch aus. - \item Trotzdem gibt es offenbar wieder Regeln. - \item So scheint einem Doppelkreuz eine Ziffer zu folgen und - Zeilen muss man offenbar mit Prozentzeichen beenden. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}[fragile]{Beobachtungen zu einem weiteren Programmtext.} - -\begin{verbatim} -for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) - a[i] = a[i]; -\end{verbatim} - \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} - \begin{itemize} - \item Wieder gibt es Regeln, die eingehalten werden. - \item Wieder fällt es uns \alert{schwerer}, diese zu erkennen, da - wir \alert{sofort über den Sinn nachdenken}. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von Programmiersprachen} - \begin{itemize} - \item Die \alert{Syntax} einer Programmiersprache ist die - \alert{Menge von Regeln}, nach der Programmtexte gebildet werden - dürfen. - \item Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der Programmtexte - ist dabei egal. - \item - Jede Programmiersprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax - verschiedener Sprachen ähneln sich aber oft. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{5-Minuten-Aufgabe} - Welche der folgenden Regeln sind Syntax-Regeln? - \begin{enumerate} - \item Bezeichner dürfen nicht mit einer Ziffer anfangen. - \item Programme müssen in endlicher Zeit ein Ergebnis produzieren. - \item Öffnende und schließende geschweifte Klammern müssen - »balanciert« sein. - \item Methoden von Null-Objekten dürfen nicht aufgerufen werden. - \item Variablen müssen vor ihrer ersten Benutzung deklariert werden. - \end{enumerate} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection[Syntax\protect\\ logischer Sprachen]{Syntax logischer Sprachen} - -\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einer logischen Formel.} - \begin{quotation} - $p \to q \land \neg q$ - \end{quotation} - - \bigskip - \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} - \begin{itemize} - \item Auch logische Formeln haben eine syntaktische Struktur. - \item So wäre es \alert{syntaktisch falsch}, statt einem Pfeil zwei - Pfeile zu benutzen. - \item Es wäre aber \alert{syntaktisch richtig}, statt einem - Negationszeichen zwei Negationszeichen zu verwenden. - \end{itemize} - \end{block} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von logischen Sprachen} - \begin{itemize} - \item Die \alert{Syntax} einer logischen Sprache ist die - \alert{Menge von Regeln}, nach der Formeln gebildet werden - dürfen. - \item Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der Formeln - ist dabei egal. - \item - Jede logische Sprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax - verschiedener Sprachen ähneln sich aber oft. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - - -\section{Was ist Semantik?} - -\subsection[Semantik\protect\\ natürlicher Sprachen]{Semantik natürlicher Sprachen} - -\begin{frame}{Was bedeutet ein Satz?} - - \begin{quotation} - Der Hörsaal ist groß. - \end{quotation} - - \bigskip - \begin{itemize} - \item Dieser Satz hat eine \alert{Bedeutung}. - \item Eine \alert{Semantik} legt solche Bedeutungen fest. - \item Syntaktisch falschen Sätzen wird im Allgemeinen keine - Bedeutung zugewiesen. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Ein Satz, zwei Bedeutungen.} - \begin{quotation} - Steter Tropfen höhlt den Stein. - \end{quotation} - - \bigskip - \begin{itemize} - \item Ein Satz kann \alert{mehrere Bedeutungen haben}, welche durch - \alert{unterschiedliche Semantiken} gegeben sind. - \item In der \alert{wortwörtlichen Semantik} sagt der Satz aus, dass - Steine ausgehöhlte werden, wenn man jahrelang Wasser auf - sie tropft. - \item In der \alert{übertragenen Semantik} sagt der Satz aus, dass - sich Beharrlichkeit auszahlt. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Die Semantik der Hieroglyphen} - \includegraphicscopyright[height=8cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg} - {Unknown Author, Public Domain, Low Resolution} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Semantik von Programmiersprachen} - -\begin{frame}[fragile]{Was bedeutet ein Programm?} -\begin{verbatim} -for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) - a[i] = a[i]; -\end{verbatim} - \begin{itemize} - \item Auch dieser Programmtext »bedeutet etwas«, wir »meinen etwas« - mit diesem Text. - \item Die \alert{Semantik der Programmiersprache} legt fest, - was mit dem Programmtext gemeint ist. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}[fragile]{Ein Programm, zwei Bedeutungen.} -\begin{verbatim} -for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) - a[i] = a[i]; -\end{verbatim} - \begin{itemize} - \item Ein Programmtext kann \alert{mehrere Bedeutungen haben}, - welche durch \alert{unterschiedliche Semantiken} gegeben sind. - \item In der \alert{operationalen Semantik} bedeutet der - Programmtext, dass die ersten einhundert Elemente eines Arrays - \verb!a! nacheinander ihren eigenen Wert zugewiesen bekommen. - \item In der \alert{denotationellen Semantik} bedeutet der - Programmtext, dass nichts passiert. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection[Semantik\protect\\ logischer Sprachen]{Semantik logischer Sprachen} - - - - -\section{Grundlage der Syntax: Text} - -\begin{frame}{Eine mathematische Sicht auf Text.} - \begin{itemize} - \item Viele (aber nicht alle!) syntaktische Systeme bauen auf - \alert{Text} auf. - \item Auch solche Systeme, die nicht auf Text aufbauen, lassen sich - trotzdem durch Text beschreiben. - \item Es ist deshalb nützlich, auf Text \text{Methoden der - Mathematik} anwenden zu können. - \item Im Folgenden wird deshalb die \alert{mathematische Sicht} auf - Text eingeführt, die \alert{in der gesamten Theoretischen - Informatik} genutzt wird. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Alphabete} - -\begin{frame}{Formale Alphabete} - \begin{definition}[Alphabet] - Ein \alert{Alphabet} ist eine nicht-leere, endliche Menge von - \alert{Symbolen} (auch \alert{Buchstaben} genannt). - \end{definition} - - \begin{itemize} - \item Alphabete werden häufig mit griechischen Großbuchstaben - bezeichnet, also $\Gamma$ oder~$\Sigma$. Manchmal auch mit - lateinischen Großbuchstaben, also $N$ oder~$T$. - \item Ein Symbol oder »Buchstabe« kann auch ein komplexes oder - komisches »Ding« sein wie ein Pointer oder ein Leerzeichen. - \end{itemize} - - \begin{examples} - \begin{itemize} - \item Die Groß- und Kleinbuchstaben - \item Die Menge $\{0,1\}$ (bei Informatikern beliebt) - \item Die Menge $\{A,C,G,T\}$ (bei Biologen beliebt) - \item Die Zeichenmenge des UNICODE. - \end{itemize} - \end{examples} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Worte} - - -\begin{frame}{Formale Worte} - \begin{definition}[Wort] - Ein \alert{Wort} ist eine (endliche) Folge von Symbolen. - \end{definition} - \begin{itemize} - \item »Worte« sind im Prinzip dasselbe wie - Strings. Insbesondere können in Worten Leerzeichen als Symbole - auftauchen. - \item Die Menge aller Worte über einem Alphabet $\Sigma$ hat einen - besonderen Namen: $\Sigma^*$. - \item - Deshalb schreibt man oft: »Sei $w \in \Sigma^*$, \dots« - \item Es gibt auch ein \alert{leeres Wort}, abgekürzt - $\epsilon$ oder $\lambda$, das dem String - \texttt{\char`\"\char`\"} entspricht. - \end{itemize} - - \begin{examples} - \begin{itemize} - \item \texttt{Hallo} - \item \texttt{TATAAAATATTA} - \item $\epsilon$ - \item \texttt{Hallo Welt.} - \end{itemize} - \end{examples} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{5-Minuten-Aufgabe} - Die folgenden Aufgaben sind nach Schwierigkeit sortiert. Lösen Sie - \alert{eine} der Aufgaben. - \begin{enumerate} - \item - Schreiben Sie alle Worte der Länge höchstens $2$ über dem Alphabet - $\Sigma = \{0,1,*\}$ auf. - \item - Wie viele Worte der Länge $n$ über dem Alphabet $\Sigma = - \{0,1,*\}$ gibt es? - \item - Wie viele Worte der Länge höchstens $n$ über einem Alphabet mit - $q$ Buchstaben gibt es? - \end{enumerate} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Sprachen} - -\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen}{Definition} - \begin{itemize} - \item Natürlichen Sprachen sind komplexe Dinge, bestehend aus - Wörtern, ihrer Ausprache, einer Grammatik, Ausnahmen, Dialekten, - und vielem mehr. - \item Bei \alert{formalen Sprachen} vereinfacht man radikal. - \item Formale Sprachen müssen weder sinnvoll noch interessant sein. - \end{itemize} - - \begin{definition}[Formale Sprache] - Eine \alert{formale Sprache} ist eine (oft unendliche!) Menge von - Worten für ein festes Alphabet. - \end{definition} - - \begin{itemize} - \item Statt \frqq formale Sprache\flqq\ sagt man einfach \frqq Sprache\flqq. - \item Als Menge von Worten ist eine Sprache eine Teilmenge von - $\Sigma^*$. - \item - Deshalb schreibt man oft: \frqq Sei $L \subseteq \Sigma^*$, - \dots\flqq - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen}{Einfache Beispiele} - \begin{examples} - \begin{itemize} - \item Die Menge $\{AAA, AAC, AAT\}$ (endliche Sprache). - \item Die Menge aller Java-Programmtexte (unendliche Sprache). - \item Die Menge aller Basensequenzen, die \texttt{TATA} enthalten - (unendliche Sprache). - \end{itemize} - \end{examples} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik} - \begin{itemize} - \item Ein Renderer produziert 3D-Bilder. - \item Dazu erhält er eine \alert{Szenerie} als Eingabe. - \item Diese Szenerie ist als \alert{Text}, also als ein \alert{Wort} gegeben. - \item Eine \alert{Syntax} beschreibt die (formale) Sprache, die alle - \alert{syntaktisch korrekten Szenerien} enthält. - \item Eine \alert{Semantik} beschreibt, was diese Beschreibungen bedeuten. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{Das - »Wort«, das eine Szenerie beschreibt\dots} -\only{\scriptsize} -\begin{verbatim*} -global_settings { assumed_gamma 1.0 } - -camera { - location <10.0, 10, -10.0> - direction 1.5*z - right x*image_width/image_height - look_at <0.0, 0.0, 0.0> -} - -sky_sphere { pigment { color rgb <0.6,0.7,1.0> } } - -light_source { - <0, 0, 0> // light's position (translated below) - color rgb <1, 1, 1> // light's color - translate <-30, 30, -30> - shadowless -} - -#declare i = 0; -#declare Steps = 30; -#declare Kugel = sphere{<0,0,0>,0.5 pigment{color rgb<1,0,0>}}; - -#while(i rotate <0,i * 360 / Steps, 0> } - #declare i = i + 1; -#end -\end{verbatim*} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{\dots\ und was es bedeutet.} - \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg} - {Copyright Matthias Kabel, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resolution} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{Komplexeres Beispielbild, das ein Renderer produziert.} - \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg} - {Copyright Giorgio Krenkel and Alex Sandri, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resolution} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik} - \begin{itemize} - \item In der Bioinformatik untersucht man unter anderem Proteine. - \item Dazu erhält man \alert{Molekülbeschreibungen} als Eingabe. - \item Eine solche ist auch ein \alert{Wort}. - \item Eine \alert{Syntax} beschreibt die (formale) Sprache, die alle - \alert{syntaktisch korrekten Molkülbeschreibungen} enthält. - \item Eine \alert{Semantik} beschreibt, was diese Beschreibungen bedeuten. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik} - {Das »Wort«, das ein Protein beschreibt\dots} -\only{\tiny} -\only
{\footnotesize} -\begin{verbatim} -HEADER HYDROLASE 25-JUL-03 1UJ1 -TITLE CRYSTAL STRUCTURE OF SARS CORONAVIRUS MAIN PROTEINASE -TITLE 2 (3CLPRO) -COMPND MOL_ID: 1; -COMPND 2 MOLECULE: 3C-LIKE PROTEINASE; -COMPND 3 CHAIN: A, B; -COMPND 4 SYNONYM: MAIN PROTEINASE, 3CLPRO; -COMPND 5 EC: 3.4.24.-; -COMPND 6 ENGINEERED: YES -SOURCE MOL_ID: 1; -SOURCE 2 ORGANISM_SCIENTIFIC: SARS CORONAVIRUS; -SOURCE 3 ORGANISM_COMMON: VIRUSES; -SOURCE 4 STRAIN: SARS; -... -REVDAT 1 18-NOV-03 1UJ1 0 -JRNL AUTH H.YANG,M.YANG,Y.DING,Y.LIU,Z.LOU,Z.ZHOU,L.SUN,L.MO, -JRNL AUTH 2 S.YE,H.PANG,G.F.GAO,K.ANAND,M.BARTLAM,R.HILGENFELD, -JRNL AUTH 3 Z.RAO -JRNL TITL THE CRYSTAL STRUCTURES OF SEVERE ACUTE RESPIRATORY -JRNL TITL 2 SYNDROME VIRUS MAIN PROTEASE AND ITS COMPLEX WITH -JRNL TITL 3 AN INHIBITOR -JRNL REF PROC.NAT.ACAD.SCI.USA V. 100 13190 2003 -JRNL REFN ASTM PNASA6 US ISSN 0027-8424 -.... -ATOM 1 N PHE A 3 63.478 -27.806 23.971 1.00 44.82 N -ATOM 2 CA PHE A 3 64.607 -26.997 24.516 1.00 42.13 C -ATOM 3 C PHE A 3 64.674 -25.701 23.723 1.00 41.61 C -ATOM 4 O PHE A 3 65.331 -25.633 22.673 1.00 40.73 O -ATOM 5 CB PHE A 3 65.912 -27.763 24.358 1.00 44.33 C -ATOM 6 CG PHE A 3 67.065 -27.162 25.108 1.00 44.20 C -ATOM 7 CD1 PHE A 3 67.083 -27.172 26.496 1.00 43.35 C -ATOM 8 CD2 PHE A 3 68.135 -26.595 24.422 1.00 43.49 C -ATOM 9 CE1 PHE A 3 68.140 -26.631 27.187 1.00 43.21 C -ATOM 10 CE2 PHE A 3 69.210 -26.046 25.108 1.00 42.91 C -ATOM 11 CZ PHE A 3 69.216 -26.062 26.493 1.00 43.22 C -ATOM 12 N ARG A 4 64.007 -24.666 24.228 1.00 34.90 N -ATOM 13 CA ARG A 4 63.951 -23.376 23.543 1.00 37.71 C -... -\end{verbatim} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik} - {\dots\ und das Protein, das beschrieben wird.} - - \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg} - {Copyright Till Tantau, Low Resultion} -\end{frame} - - -\section
{Zusammenfassung} -\section*{Zusammenfassung} - -\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung} - \begin{enumerate} - \item Ein \alert{Wort} ist eine Folge von Symbolen aus einem - \alert{Alphabet}. - \item Eine \alert{Syntax} besteht aus Regeln, nach denen - Worte (Texte) gebaut werden dürfen. - \item Eine \alert{Semantik} legt fest, was Worte \alert{bedeuten}. - \item Eine \alert{formale Sprache} ist eine Menge von Worten - über einem Alphabet. - \end{enumerate} -\end{frame} - -\end{document} - - - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf deleted file mode 100644 index d870b1203d2..00000000000 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf and /dev/null differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg deleted file mode 100644 index 7fbce74d3e3..00000000000 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg and /dev/null differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg deleted file mode 100644 index 958a7f288b5..00000000000 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg and /dev/null differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg deleted file mode 100644 index 67c4bce95c1..00000000000 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg and /dev/null differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg deleted file mode 100644 index fd6c9c1b22e..00000000000 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg and /dev/null differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg deleted file mode 100644 index 0a18dc5a735..00000000000 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg and /dev/null differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg deleted file mode 100644 index fb451d9195b..00000000000 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg and /dev/null differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.pdf index 7ae95820585..730113c37a6 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex deleted file mode 100644 index ee5a65c8d28..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified -% -% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or -% 2. under the GNU Public License. -% -% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. - -\documentclass[german,a4paper,9pt]{extarticle} -\usepackage{beamerarticle} -\input{beamerexample-lecture-style.tex} -\input{beamerexample-lecture-body.tex} - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex deleted file mode 100644 index e24a409cfb8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,233 +0,0 @@ -% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified -% -% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or -% 2. under the GNU Public License. -% -% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. - - -% Common packages - -\usepackage[german]{babel} -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -\usepackage{times} -\mode
-{ - \usepackage{times} - \usepackage{mathptmx} - \usepackage[left=1.5cm,right=6cm,top=1.5cm,bottom=3cm]{geometry} -} - -\usepackage{hyperref} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage{tikz} -\usepackage{colortbl} -\usepackage{yfonts} -\usepackage{colortbl} -\usepackage{translator} % comment this, if not available - - -% Common settings for all lectures in this course - -\def\lecturename{Logik für Informatiker} - -\title{\insertlecture} - -\author{Till Tantau} - -\institute -{ - Institut für Theoretische Informatik\\ - Universität zu Lübeck -} - -\subject{Vorlesung \lecturename} - - - - -% Beamer version theme settings - -\useoutertheme[height=0pt,width=2cm,right]{sidebar} -\usecolortheme{rose,sidebartab} -\useinnertheme{circles} -\usefonttheme[only large]{structurebold} - -\setbeamercolor{sidebar right}{bg=black!15} -\setbeamercolor{structure}{fg=blue} -\setbeamercolor{author}{parent=structure} - -\setbeamerfont{title}{series=\normalfont,size=\LARGE} -\setbeamerfont{title in sidebar}{series=\bfseries} -\setbeamerfont{author in sidebar}{series=\bfseries} -\setbeamerfont*{item}{series=} -\setbeamerfont{frametitle}{size=} -\setbeamerfont{block title}{size=\small} -\setbeamerfont{subtitle}{size=\normalsize,series=\normalfont} - -\setbeamertemplate{navigation symbols}{} -\setbeamertemplate{bibliography item}[book] -\setbeamertemplate{sidebar right} -{ - {\usebeamerfont{title in sidebar}% - \vskip1.5em% - \hskip3pt% - \usebeamercolor[fg]{title in sidebar}% - \insertshorttitle[width=\dimexpr2cm-6pt\relax,center,respectlinebreaks]\par% - \vskip1.25em% - }% - {% - \hskip1pt% - \usebeamercolor[fg]{author in sidebar}% - \usebeamerfont{author in sidebar}% - \insertshortauthor[width=\dimexpr2cm-2pt\relax,center,respectlinebreaks]\par% - \vskip1.25em% - }% - \hbox to2cm{\hss\insertlogo\hss} - \vskip1.25em% - \insertverticalnavigation{2cm}% - \vfill - \hbox to 2cm{\hfill\usebeamerfont{subsection in - sidebar}\strut\usebeamercolor[fg]{subsection in - sidebar}\insertshortlecture.\insertframenumber\hskip5pt}% - \vskip3pt% -}% - -\setbeamertemplate{title page} -{ - \vbox{} - \vskip1em - {\huge Kapitel \insertshortlecture\par} - {\usebeamercolor[fg]{title}\usebeamerfont{title}\inserttitle\par}% - \ifx\insertsubtitle\@empty% - \else% - \vskip0.25em% - {\usebeamerfont{subtitle}\usebeamercolor[fg]{subtitle}\insertsubtitle\par}% - \fi% - \vskip1em\par - Vorlesung \emph{\lecturename}\ vom \insertdate\par - \vskip0pt plus1filll - \leftskip=0pt plus1fill\insertauthor\par - \insertinstitute\vskip1em -} - -\logo{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf}} - - - -% Article version layout settings - -\mode
- -\makeatletter -\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini - \parsep 0pt - \topsep 5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@ - \itemsep0pt} -\let\@listi=\@listI - - -\setbeamertemplate{frametitle}{\paragraph*{\insertframetitle\ - \ \small\insertframesubtitle}\ \par -} -\setbeamertemplate{frame end}{% - \marginpar{\scriptsize\hbox to 1cm{\sffamily% - \hfill\strut\insertshortlecture.\insertframenumber}\hrule height .2pt}} -\setlength{\marginparwidth}{1cm} -\setlength{\marginparsep}{4.5cm} - -\def\@maketitle{\makechapter} - -\def\makechapter{ - \newpage - \null - \vskip 2em% - {% - \parindent=0pt - \raggedright - \sffamily - \vskip8pt - {\fontsize{36pt}{36pt}\selectfont Kapitel \insertshortlecture \par\vskip2pt} - {\fontsize{24pt}{28pt}\selectfont \color{blue!50!black} \insertlecture\par\vskip4pt} - {\Large\selectfont \color{blue!50!black} \insertsubtitle\par} - \vskip10pt - - \normalsize\selectfont Druckfassung der - Vorlesung \emph{\lecturename} vom \@date\par\vskip1.5em - \hfill Till Tantau, Institut für Theoretische Informatik, Universität zu Lübeck - } - \par - \vskip 1.5em% -} - -\let\origstartsection=\@startsection -\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{% - \origstartsection{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6\normalfont\sffamily\color{blue!50!black}\selectfont}} - -\makeatother - -\mode - - - - - -% Typesetting Listings - -\usepackage{listings} -\lstset{language=Java} - -\alt -{\lstset{% - basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily, - commentstyle=\slshape\color{green!50!black}, - keywordstyle=\bfseries\color{blue!50!black}, - identifierstyle=\color{blue}, - stringstyle=\color{orange}, - escapechar=\#, - emphstyle=\color{red}} -} -{ - \lstset{% - basicstyle=\ttfamily, - keywordstyle=\bfseries, - commentstyle=\itshape, - escapechar=\#, - emphstyle=\bfseries\color{red} - } -} - - - -% Common theorem-like environments - -\theoremstyle{definition} -\newtheorem{exercise}[theorem]{\translate{Exercise}} - - - - -% New useful definitions: - -\newbox\mytempbox -\newdimen\mytempdimen - -\newcommand\includegraphicscopyright[3][]{% - \leavevmode\vbox{\vskip3pt\raggedright\setbox\mytempbox=\hbox{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}% - \mytempdimen=\wd\mytempbox\box\mytempbox\par\vskip1pt% - \fontsize{3}{3.5}\selectfont{\color{black!25}{\vbox{\hsize=\mytempdimen#3}}}\vskip3pt% -}} - -\newenvironment{colortabular}[1]{\medskip\rowcolors[]{1}{blue!20}{blue!10}\tabular{#1}\rowcolor{blue!40}}{\endtabular\medskip} - -\def\equad{\leavevmode\hbox{}\quad} - -\newenvironment{greencolortabular}[1] -{\medskip\rowcolors[]{1}{green!50!black!20}{green!50!black!10}% - \tabular{#1}\rowcolor{green!50!black!40}}% -{\endtabular\medskip} - - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 4e8ba17d19d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified -% -% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or -% 2. under the GNU Public License. -% -% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. - -% $Header$ - -\documentclass[notes]{beamer} - -% You might wish to try this instead of the above line: -%\documentclass[class=article]{beamer} -%\usepackage{beamerbasearticle} -%\usepackage{hyperref} - -\usepackage[framesassubsections]{beamerprosper} - -\mode -{ - \definecolor{beamerstructure}{RGB}{43,79,112} - \definecolor{sidebackground}{RGB}{230,242,250} - \color{beamerstructure} - \usetheme{Goettingen} - \usepackage{times} - \userightsidebarcolortemplate{\color{sidebackground}} - \beamertemplateballitem -} - - -\title{A Beamer Presentation Using (HA-)Prosper Commands} -\subtitle{Subtitles Are Also Supported} -\author{Till Tantau} -\institution{The Institution is Mapped To Institute} - -\begin{document} - -\maketitle - -\tsectionandpart{Introduction} - -\overlays{2}{ -\begin{slide}[trans=Glitter]{About this file} - \begin{itemstep} - \item - This is a beamer presentation. - \item - You can use the prosper and the HA-prosper syntax. - \item - This is done by mapping prosper and HA-prosper commands to beamer - commands. - \item - The emulation is by no means perfect. - \end{itemstep} -\end{slide} -} - - -\section{Second Section} - -\subsection{A subsection} - -\frame -{ - \frametitle{A frame created using the \texttt{frame} command.} - - \begin{itemize}[<+->] - \item You can still use the original beamer syntax. - \item The emulation is intended only to make recycling slides - easier, not to install a whole new syntax for beamer. - \end{itemize} -} - -\begin{notes}{Notes for these slides} -My notes for these slides. -\end{notes} - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 10f3407d41c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,331 +0,0 @@ -% $Header$ - -% This file is a demonstration on how a seminar file should be -% changed to make it work with beamer. - - -% Copyright notice: - -% Except for the changes indicated by CHANGED, this file is the original -% file semsamp2.tex, which is part of the examples of the seminar -% package. - - -%% BEGIN semsamp2.tex -% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later). -% -% This file contains both landscape and portrait mode slides. -% Choose one of the following to print them out: -% - If using PSTricks, try the semcolor style option. -% - If using Rokicki's dvips, try the semrot style option. -% - To print the landscape slides, put \landscapeonly in the preamble. -% To print the portrait slides, include the portrait style option and -% put \portraitonly in the preamble. -% -% - -% CHANGED: commented the following: -%\documentstyle[% -% slidesonly,% Try notes or notesonly instead. -% %notes,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset the notes. -% %notesonly,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset notes and slides. -% %semcolor,% Try me if using PSTricks. -% %semrot,% Try me if using Rokicki's dvips. -% %semhelv,% Try me if using a PostScript printer. -% %article,% Try me. -% %portrait,% Try me. -% %sem-a4,% Try me if using A4 paper. -% semlayer% This must be included, but you need the semcolor option to -% ]{seminar} % actually see the overlays. -% -%\slidesmag{5} -%\articlemag{1} -% -%%\twoup % Try me for twoup printing. -% -%%\portraitonly % To print only portrait slides -%%\landscapeonly % To print only landscape slides -% -%%\notslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: The slides are omitted. -%%\onlyslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: Only these slides are included. -%%\onlynotestoo %Try me: For selecting notes as well. -% -%\colorlayers{red,blue} % Try deleting this if using the semcolor option, -% % to get \blue and \red to use PostScript color. -% -%%\overlaysfalse % Suppress overlays with semcolor option. -%%\layersfalse % Suppress color layers with semcolor option. -% -%\rotateheaderstrue % Try this out if using rotation macros. - -% CHANGED: Added following three lines: -\documentclass[ignorenonframetext]{beamer} -\usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar} - % remove ``accumulated'' option - % for original behaviour -\usepackage{beamerthemeclassic} - -\title{Example for seminar.sty} -\author{Policarpa Salabarrieta} -\date{July 21, 1991} - -\newcommand{\sref}[1]{SLIDE \ref{#1}} - -% CHANGED: different definition of \heading -%\newcommand{\heading}[1]{\begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}} -\let\heading=\frametitle - -% CHANGED: Commented: -%\newpagestyle{MH}% -% {University of Guaduas, March 13, 1998\hfil\thepage}{} -%\pagestyle{MH} - -\begin{document} - -% CHANGED: Added \frame -\frame{ -\maketitle % This won't show up when \onlynotestoo is in effect. -} - -% CHANGED: Commented -%\begin{slide} -% \ifslidesonly % Title slide only for slidesonly selection. -% \maketitle -% \addtocounter{slide}{-1} -% \slidepagestyle{empty} -% \fi -%\end{slide} - - -This is a lot of gobbledy-gook intended only to illustrate some of the -features of seminar.sty. - - The phrase information overload rings a bell with just about anyone. -Certainly you all receive more working papers or more applications for -graduate school than you can readily read. Nevertheless, the term information -overload is ill-defined. (\sref{too_much}, top) - - A message like this when you check your email conjures up the notion of -information overload. More generally, information overload always means too -much information, in some sense or another. But what does ``too much'' mean? -(\sref{too_much}, bottom) It might just mean that people cannot process all -the information they receive. That is certainly true for everyone. A claim -that is much stronger, and that is implicit when people complain about -information overload, is that people {\em should} receive less information, by -some criterion. - -% CHANGED: Added \frame -\frame{ -\begin{slide}\label{too_much}% -\begin{center} - \large\bf - Information overload = ``Too much'' information -\end{center} -\smallskip - -\begin{verse} \bf\tt - You have 134 unread messages:\\ - Do you want to read them now? -\end{verse} - -\begin{enumerate} - {\overlay2 - \item People {\overlay1 cannot process all} the information they receive.} - \item People {\em should} receive less information. - \end{enumerate} -\end{slide} -} - - In this paper, I use the term ``information overload'' in both senses. -(\sref{overload}, bottom). Specifically, I say that an {\em individual} is -overloaded with information if she receives more information than she can -process. But I say that there is information overload in a {\em network} if -there is some mechanism that makes the senders and/or receivers better off by -restricting the flow of information. This latter notion of information -overload is an equilibrium property, and it depends on what we mean by -``better off.'' - -% CHANGED: Added \frame -\frame{ -\begin{slide*}\label{overload} -\ptsize{12} - -\begin{itemize}{\overlay1 - \item There is information {\overlay0 overload in a network if} there is -some mechanism that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders -and/or receivers better off by restricting the flow} of information.' - - \item There is information overload in a network if there is some mechanism -that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders and/or receivers -better off by restricting the flow of information. -\end{itemize} - -\end{slide*} -} - -(\sref{questions}) - The purpose of my paper is to show why there can be information overload in -a network and what kind of mechanisms can make the receivers and/or senders -better off. Since the cost of communication is one factor that restricts -communication, I am thus also going to look at how the welfare of the senders -and receivers depends on the cost of communication. - - Most messages don't become jumbled and we can choose which ones to process. -But some of us may have a bias towards choosing to process more information -than we should, like the graduate student who feels compelled to read every -article on the usual lengthy reading list, and just ends up getting confused -and ruffling through the papers. - -% CHANGED: Added \frame -\frame{ -\begin{slide}[7.3in,5.5in] \label{questions} -\heading{Questions} - -\begin{itemize} - {\overlay1\item When could {\blue there be overload} in networks?} - \item What mechanism make the receivers and senders better off? - \item How does the welfare {\red of the senders} and receivers depend on the -cost of communication? -\end{itemize} -\end{slide} -} - -However, experiments in consumer research and psychology have failed to find -that such a bias is prevalent. This is in spite of the fact that it is common -for stress and cognitive strain to increase with information load. We may -incur such stress and strain because the information we choose to process is -valuable to us. - -More commonly, then, we can and do choose to process roughly as much -information as we can handle efficiently. This is called screening. But when -we choose which messages to begin to process, we're ignorant of their -contents, since otherwise there would be no reason to process them in the -first place. Therefore, if we receive more junk mail, then some of the -important mail gets crowded out, and we are effectively less informed. - - -% CHANGED: Added \frame -\frame{ -\begin{slide} \label{informed} -\begin{center} - {\bf Being more informed} \par - \smallskip - is always better,\par - \medskip - \overlay1{but it's not the same as \par - \smallskip - {\bf receiving more information}} -\end{center} -\end{slide} -} - - Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I -present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to -ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most -want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with -information. Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that -sender will prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the -sender has an interest in which messages the receiver processes. -But when there are more senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the -messages of the other senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't -take this external cost into account when sending messages, they may -collectively overload the receiver. (\sref{akbar}) - -There are several reasons that our scarcity of attention, that is, our limited -capacity to process information, can mean that we become less informed when we -receive more information. I have a cartoon here to illustrate these reasons. -(\sref{akbar}) - -% CHANGED: Added \frame -\frame{ -\begin{slide}\label{akbar}\def\slidefuzz{15pt} - {\large A tax $\tau$ on communication is said to support -$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is an equilibrium for -$\Gamma(c+\tau)$.} -\medskip - - {\bf Proposition 6.} {\em Assume $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is not an equilibrium -for $\Gamma(c)$.\vspace{-3pt} -\begin{enumerate} - \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=[0,1]^n$, there is no tax that supports -$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$. - \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=S^{n-1}$, there is a tax that supports -$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if and only if $m=1$, $p_j>c\, \forall j$, and - \begin{enumerate} - \item $n=2$; or - \item $n=3$ and $p_i^{-1}+p_j^{-1}\geq p_k^{-1}$ for all distinct -$i,j,k$; or - \item $n=4$ and $p_1=p_2=p_3=p_4$. -\end{enumerate} -\end{enumerate}} -\end{slide} -} - If, by restricting communication, we eliminate the less relevant messages, -then we can become more informed. But how can we achieve this? Restricting the -flow of information shifts the task of screening messages from the receivers -to the senders. Unlike the receivers, the senders do know the contents of the -messages they originate. If the senders' interests coincide with those of the -receiver and if the senders have sufficient knowledge about the receivers, -then the senders will choose the messages which are most relevant to the -receivers. This may make the receivers, and even the senders, better off. - - The network in Slide \ref{architectures} attains the minimal delay $c(8,24) -= 6$ using 8 processors. It is an example of the efficient one-shot networks -described by Foo. We will focus on a class of networks that are similar to the -Foo networks but that may differ slightly. For $q$, $c$ and $n$ such that $1 -\leq q \leq \lfloor n/2 \rfloor$ and $c(q,n) \leq c \leq n$, let $R_{nqc}$ be -the class of essential networks for adding $n$ items using $q$ processors in -$c$ cycles that have the following properties: - -% CHANGED: Added \frame -\frame{ -\begin{slide*}\label{architectures} -\heading{Architecture} - -\begin{center} -\setlength{\unitlength}{1.65in} -\begin{picture}(1.1,1.6)(3.5,5.0) -\put(4.0,6.5){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.1,6.5){1} -\put(4.0,6.0){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.1,6.0){2} -\put(4.0,6.1){\vector(0,1){.3}} -\put(3.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}} -\put(3.6,6.0){3} -\put(3.6,6.1){\vector(1,1){.3}} -\put(4.0,5.5){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.1,5.5){4} -\put(4.0,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}} -\put(4.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.6,6.0){5} -\put(4.4,6.1){\vector(-1,1){.3}} -\put(4.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.6,5.5){6} -\put(4.4,5.6){\vector(-1,1){.3}} -\put(3.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}} -\put(3.6,5.5){7} -\put(3.5,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}} -\put(4.0,5.0){\circle*{.04}} -\put(4.1,5.0){8} -\put(4.0,5.1){\vector(0,1){.3}} -\end{picture} -\end{center} -\end{slide*} -} - -Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I -present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to -ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most -want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with -information. - -Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that sender will -prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the sender has -an interest in which messages the receiver processes. But when there are more -senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the messages of the other -senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't take this external cost -into account when sending messages, they may collectively overload the -receiver. (\sref{architectures}) - -\end{document} -%% END semsamp2.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 67fcdd15605..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,271 +0,0 @@ -% $Header$ - -% This file is a demonstration on how a seminar file should be -% changed to make it work with beamer. - - -% Copyright notice: - -% Except for the changes indicated by CHANGED, this file is the original -% file texpower-0.0.9d/doc/seminardemo.tex, which is part of the -% examples of the texpower package. - - - -% seminardemo.tex,v 1.2 2002/11/14 20:46:00 hansfn Exp -% -% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX -% Copyright (C) 1999-2002 Stephan Lehmke -% -% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or -% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License -% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 -% of the License, or (at your option) any later version. -% -% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -% GNU General Public License for more details. -% -%----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -% File: seminardemo.tex -% -% Simple examples the for combining the seminar class with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty. -% -%----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -% Autor: Stephan Lehmke -% -% v0.0.1 Jun 02, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower. -% - - -% CHANGED: commented -%\documentclass{seminar} -% -%% We need fixseminar for setting the page size correctly. -% -%\usepackage{fixseminar} -% -% -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% The texpower package is loaded. -%% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled. -%% -%\usepackage[display]{texpower} - -% CHANGED: Added -\documentclass[slidestop,usepdftitle=false]{beamer} -\usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar} -\usepackage{beamertexpower} -\usepackage{beamerthemeshadow} - - -% CHANGED: Moved \title and \author outside of slide -\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\ {\normalfont \texttt{seminar} Demo}} -\author[Stephan Lehmke]{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}} - -\begin{document} -\begin{slide} - -\maketitle - -\newslide - -\tableofcontents -\end{slide} - -% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out, added \frametitle -\section{A list environment} -\frame{ -\begin{slide} -\centerslidesfalse -\frametitle{A list environment} - -% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which -% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages -% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation -% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to -% the next page. - -\pause - -% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For -% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step -% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the -% \step commands appear ``one by one''. - -\stepwise -{% - \begin{description} - \item[foo.] \step{bar.} - \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.} - \end{description} - } - - - -\end{slide} -} - -% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out -\section{An aligned equation} -\frame{ -\begin{slide} -\centerslidesfalse -\frametitle{An aligned equation} - -\pause - -% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb -% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step. -% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the -% proper amount of white space. - -\parstepwise -{% - % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only - % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation - % numbers `appear'. - \begin{eqnarray} - % - % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As - % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the - % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command. - % - \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\ - % - & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\ - % - & \step{=} & \restep - {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the - % order of appearance, independent of nesting. - % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on - % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'. - % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be - % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed. - \switch - {% - \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}% - (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)% - } - {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}% - } - \\ - % - % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by - % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator. - % - & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}} - \end{eqnarray} -} - - - - -\end{slide} -} - -% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out -\section{An array} -\frame{ -\begin{slide} - \centerslidesfalse - \frametitle{An array} - -\stepwise -{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths. - % - % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that - % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step, - % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning. - % - % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the - % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the - % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by - % a) using only p cells, - % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If - % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into - % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth. - % - \begin{displaymath} - \begin{array}{rrrrr} - \step - {% - n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\ - \hline% - }% - \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}% - \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}% - \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}% - \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}% - \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}% - \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }% - \end{array} - \end{displaymath} -} - - - - -\end{slide} -} - -% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out -\section{A picture} -\frame{ -\begin{slide} -\centerslidesfalse -\frametitle{A picture} - -\pause - -\begin{center}% - \stepwise - {% - \setlength{\unitlength}{1.5\semcm}% - \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces - \begin{picture}(14,2) - \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}} - \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}} - \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}} - \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}} - \step - { - \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}} - \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}} - \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}} - \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}} - } - \step - { - \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}} - \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}} - } - \step - { - \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}} - } - \step - { - \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}} - % - % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step. - % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of - % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for - % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces. - % - \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\footnotesize $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}} - } - \step - { - \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}} - \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}} - \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}} - \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}} - } - \end{picture}% - }% -\end{center}% -\end{slide} -} -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex index 37c01c0bb43..535562600f7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex @@ -79,10 +79,10 @@ When using certain packages or classes together with the |beamer| class, extra o If you wish to emulate the |foils| class using \beamer, please see Section~\ref{section-foiltex}. \end{class} -\begin{package}{{fontenc}|[|\declare{|T1,EU1,EU2|}|]|} - Use the |T1| option \emph{only} with fonts that have outline fonts available in the T1 encoding like |times| or the |lmodern| fonts. In a standard installation standard Computer Modern fonts (the fonts Donald Knuth originally designed and which are used by default) are \emph{not} available in the T1 encoding. Using this option with them will result in very poor rendering of your presentation when viewed with \pdf\ viewer applications like Acrobat, |xpdf|, |evince| or |okular|. To use the Computer Modern fonts with the T1 encoding, use the package |lmodern|. See also Section~\ref{section-font-encoding}. This applies both to |latex|+|dvips| and |pdflatex| +\begin{package}{{fontenc}|[|\declare{|T1,TU|}|]|} + Use the |T1| option \emph{only} with fonts that have outline fonts available in the T1 encoding like |times| or the |lmodern| fonts. In a standard installation standard Computer Modern fonts (the fonts Donald Knuth originally designed and which are used by default) are \emph{not} available in the T1 encoding. Using this option with them will result in very poor rendering of your presentation when viewed with \pdf\ viewer applications like Acrobat, |xpdf|, |evince| or |okular|. To use the Computer Modern fonts with the T1 encoding, make sure you have installed |cm-super| package in your \TeX\ distribution, or use Latin Modern fonts provided by |lmorden| instead. See also Section~\ref{section-font-encoding}. This applies both to |latex|+|dvips| and |pdflatex|. - Use the |EU1| option with |xelatex|, and |EU2| option with |lualatex|. Note that |xelatex| and |luatex| support OpenType fonts, and font encodings work very different compared to |pdflatex|. Again, see Section~\ref{section-font-encoding} for more information. + The newest version of \LaTeXe\ kernel has introduced TU encoding for |xelatex| and |lualatex|. Note that |xelatex| and |lualatex| support OpenType fonts, and font encodings work very different compared to |pdflatex|. Again, see Section~\ref{section-font-encoding} for more information. \end{package} \begin{package}{{fourier}} @@ -168,7 +168,13 @@ When using certain packages or classes together with the |beamer| class, extra o \begin{package}{{paralist}} \beamernote - \beamer\ automatically patches list-related commands using |beamerpatchparalist| package at the beginning of document. + \beamer\ automatically patches list-related commands using |beamerpatchparalist| package at the beginning of document. Besides, \beamer\ also supports using |compactitem| and |compactenum| environments with overlays, just like the usage of |enumerate| environments: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{compactitem}[<+->][$\bullet$] + \item Alpha + \item Bravo +\end{compactitem} +\end{verbatim} \end{package} \begin{package}{{pdfpages}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex index 60f6fcb0add..b3ac8910c90 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ In the following examples the color theme |seahorse| is used. Since the default \begin{outerthemeexample}{infolines} This theme installs a headline showing the current section and the current subsection. It installs a footline showing the author's name, the institution, the presentation's title, the current date, and a frame count. This theme uses only little space. - The colors used in the headline and footline are drawn from |palette primary|, |palette secondary|, and |primary tertiary| (see Section~\ref{section-colors} for details on how to change these). + The colors used in the headline and footline are drawn from |palette primary|, |palette secondary|, and |palette tertiary| (see Section~\ref{section-colors} for details on how to change these). \end{outerthemeexample} \begin{outerthemeexample}[\oarg{options}]{miniframes} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex index b1490c7ddb9..a001e152d77 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ To select the T1 encoding, use \verb|\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}|. Thus, if you hav \end{verbatim} to get beautiful outline fonts and correct hyphenation. Note, however, that certain older versions of the LM~bundle did not include correct glyphs for ligatures like ``fi,'' which may cause trouble. Double check that all ligatures are displayed correctly and, if not, update your installation. -Everything mentioned above applies to |pdflatex| and |latex|+|dvips|. Unlike those engines, |xelatex| and |lualatex| support OpenType fonts, and that means that you can use system fonts in your documents relatively easy. Details will eventually be documented in this manual. For now, you can take a look at the documentation for the |fontspec| package which supports both engines. Also, note that when you use |lualatex| or |xelatex| with EU2 or EU1 encoding, respectively, by default you get OpenType Latin Modern fonts. +Everything mentioned above applies to |pdflatex| and |latex|+|dvips|. Unlike those engines, |xelatex| and |lualatex| support OpenType fonts, and that means that you can use system fonts in your documents relatively easy. Details will eventually be documented in this manual. For now, you can take a look at the documentation for the |fontspec| package which supports both engines. Also, note that when you use |lualatex| or |xelatex| with TU encoding, respectively, by default you get OpenType Latin Modern fonts. \subsection{Changing the Fonts Used for Different Elements of a Presentation} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex index e08211badd3..bc961c2bf0c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex @@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ In |article| mode, theorems are automatically numbered. By specifying the class You can define new environments using the following command: \begin{command}{\newtheorem\opt{|*|}\marg{environment name}\oarg{numbered same as}\marg{head text}\oarg{number within}} - This command is used exactly the same way as in the |amsthm| package (as a matter of fact, it is the command from that package), see its documentation. The only difference is that environments declared using this command are overlay specification-aware in \beamer\ and that, when typeset, are typeset according to \beamer's templates. + This command is used exactly the same way as in the |amsthm| package (as a matter of fact, it is the command from that package). For example, the two optional arguments, \meta{numbered same as} and \meta{number within}, are mutually exclusive; see the documentation of |amsthm| for details. The only difference is that environments declared using this command are overlay specification-aware in \beamer\ and that, when typeset, are typeset according to \beamer's templates. \articlenote Environments declared using this command are also overlay specification-aware in |article| mode. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex index 5058b954ab8..e454665631a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex @@ -311,6 +311,8 @@ The second flavor of the |\mode| command takes no argument. ``No argument'' mean \emph{Note:} When a \TeX\ file ends, \TeX\ must not be in the gobbling state. Switch this state off using |\mode| on one line and || on the next. + \emph{Note:} The behavior of |\mode| command is different inside a frame: instead of line-wise gobbling, it puts every subsequent tokens inside a ``comment box'' until another |\mode| command is encountered. Some commands may cause errors in this situation, including the assignment of global variables and |\mode| of the first flavor, since they are not actually ``gobbled''. Please use |\mode| command \emph{of any flavor} outside frames. + \example \begin{verbatim} \mode
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.pdf index f8f5a0142a4..26156e26324 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex index b10edcbd315..9fe25be46f1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ \documentclass{ltxdoc} -\def\beamerugversion{3.56} +\def\beamerugversion{3.57} \def\beamerugpgfversion{1.00} \def\beamerugxcolorversion{2.00} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 7f602b73475..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,293 +0,0 @@ -% $Header$ - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% Diese Datei enthält eine Lösungsvorlage für: - -% - Vorträge bei einer (deutschsprachigen) Konferenz/einem Kolloquium. -% - Vortragslänge von etwa 20 Minuten. -% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschnörkelt/dekorativ. - - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under -% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified -% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a -% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another -% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and -% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright -% notice. - - - -\mode -{ - \usetheme{Warsaw} - % oder ... - - \setbeamercovered{transparent} - % oder auch nicht -} - - -\usepackage[german]{babel} -% oder was auch immer - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% oder was auch immer - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen -% müssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile -% mit fontenc zu löschen. - - -\title[Kurzversion des Titels] % (optional, nur bei langen Titeln nötig) -{Titel wie im Tagunsband angegeben\\ (u.U.\ also englisch)} - -\subtitle -{Untertitel nur angeben, wenn es einen im Tagungsband gibt} - -\author[Autor, Anders] % (optional, nur bei vielen Autoren) -{F.~Autor\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}} -% - Namen müssen in derselben Reihenfolge wie im Papier erscheinen. -% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren -% unterschiedlichen Instituten angehören. - -\institute[Universitäten Hier und Dort] % (optional, aber oft nötig) -{ - \inst{1}% - Institut für Informatik\\ - Universität Hier - \and - \inst{2}% - Institut für theoretische Philosophie\\ - Universität Dort} -% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren -% unterschiedlichen Instituten angehören. -% - Keep it simple, niemand interessiert sich für die genau Adresse. - -\date[KPT 2003] % (optional, sollte der abgekürzte Konferenzname sein) -{Konferenz über Präsentationstechniken, 2004} -% - Vollee oder abgekürzter Name sind möglich. -% - Dieser Eintrag ist nicht für das Publikum gedacht (das weiß -% nämlich, bei welcher Konferenz es ist), sondern für Leute, die die -% Folien später lesen. - -\subject{Informatik} -% Dies wird lediglich in den PDF Informationskatalog einfügt. Kann gut -% weggelassen werden. - - -% Falls eine Logodatei namens "university-logo-filename.xxx" vorhanden -% ist, wobei xxx ein von latex bzw. pdflatex lesbares Graphikformat -% ist, so kann man wie folgt ein Logo einfügen: - -% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename} -% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}} - - - -% Folgendes sollte gelöscht werden, wenn man nicht am Anfang jedes -% Unterabschnitts die Gliederung nochmal sehen möchte. -\AtBeginSubsection[] -{ - \begin{frame}{Gliederung} - \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] - \end{frame} -} - - -% Falls Aufzählungen immer schrittweise gezeigt werden sollen, kann -% folgendes Kommando benutzt werden: - -%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} - - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame} - \titlepage -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Gliederung} - \tableofcontents - % Die Option [pausesections] könnte nützlich sein. -\end{frame} - - - -% Einen Vortrag zu strukturieren ist nicht immer einfach. Die -% nachfolgende Struktur kann unangemessen sein. Hier ein paar Regeln, -% die für diese Lösungsvorlage gelten: - -% - Es sollte genau zwei oder drei Abschnitte geben (neben der -% Zusammenfassung). -% - *Höchstens* drei Unterabschnitte pro Abschnitt. -% - Pro Rahmen sollte man zwischen 30s und 2min reden. Es sollte also -% 15 bis 30 Rahmen geben. - -% - Konferenzteilnehmer wissen oft wenig von der Materie des -% Vortrags. Deshalb: vereinfachen! -% - In 20 Minuten ist es schon schwer genug, die Hauptbotschaft zu -% vermitteln. Deshalb sollten Details ausgelassen werden, selbst -% wenn dies zu Ungenauigkeiten oder Halbwahrheiten führt. -% - Falls man Details weglässt, die eigentlich wichtig für einen -% Beweis/Implementation sind, so sagt man dies einmal nüchtern. Alle -% werden damit glücklich sein. - -\section{Motivation} - -\subsection{Das behandelte Problem} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.\\ - Korrekte Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachten.}{Untertitel sind optional.} - % - Eine Überschrift fasst einen Rahmen verständlich zusammen. Man - % muss sie verstehen können, selbst wenn man nicht den Rest des - % Rahmens versteht. - - \begin{itemize} - \item - Viel \texttt{itemize} benutzen. - \item - Sehr kurze Sätze oder Satzglieder verwenden. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} - - Man kann Overlays erzeugen\dots - \begin{itemize} - \item mit dem \texttt{pause}-Befehl: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Erster Punkt. - \pause - \item - Zweiter Punkt. - \end{itemize} - \item - mittels Overlay-Spezifikationen: - \begin{itemize} - \item<3-> - Erster Punkt. - \item<4-> - Zweiter Punkt. - \end{itemize} - \item - mit dem allgemeinen \texttt{uncover}-Befehl: - \begin{itemize} - \uncover<5->{\item - Erster Punkt.} - \uncover<6->{\item - Zweiter Punkt.} - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Frühere Arbeiten} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - - -\section{Unsere Resultate/Beitrag} - -\subsection{Hauptresultate} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - - - -\subsection{Beweis-/Implementationsideen} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - - - -\section*{Zusammenfassung} - -\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung} - - % Die Zusammenfassung sollte sehr kurz sein. - \begin{itemize} - \item - Die \alert{erste Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen. - \item - Die \alert{zweite Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen. - \item - Eventuell noch eine \alert{dritte Botschaft}, aber nicht noch mehr. - \end{itemize} - - % Der folgende Ausblick ist optional. - \vskip0pt plus.5fill - \begin{itemize} - \item - Ausblick - \begin{itemize} - \item - Etwas, was wir noch nicht lösen konnten. - \item - Nochwas, das wir noch nicht lösen konnten. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - - -% Alles nachfolgende ist optional und typischerweise nicht nötig. -\appendix -\section*{\appendixname} -\subsection*{Weiterführende Literatur} - -\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks] - \frametitle{Weiterführende Literatur} - - \begin{thebibliography}{10} - - \beamertemplatebookbibitems - % Anfangen sollte man mit Übersichtswerken. - - \bibitem{Autor1990} - A.~Autor. - \newblock {\em Einführung in das Präsentationswesen}. - \newblock Klein-Verlag, 1990. - - - \beamertemplatearticlebibitems - % Vertiefende Literatur kommt später. Die Liste sollte kurz sein. - - \bibitem{Jemand2000} - S.~Jemand. - \newblock On this and that. - \newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100, 2000. - \end{thebibliography} -\end{frame} - -\end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 6b9195dc674..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,285 +0,0 @@ -% $Header$ - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% This file is a solution template for: - -% - Talk at a conference/colloquium. -% - Talk length is about 20min. -% - Style is ornate. - - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under -% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified -% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a -% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another -% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and -% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright -% notice. - - -\mode -{ - \usetheme{Warsaw} - % or ... - - \setbeamercovered{transparent} - % or whatever (possibly just delete it) -} - - -\usepackage[english]{babel} -% or whatever - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% or whatever - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1 -% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc. - - -\title[Short Paper Title] % (optional, use only with long paper titles) -{Title As It Is In the Proceedings} - -\subtitle -{Include Only If Paper Has a Subtitle} - -\author[Author, Another] % (optional, use only with lots of authors) -{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Another\inst{2}} -% - Give the names in the same order as the appear in the paper. -% - Use the \inst{?} command only if the authors have different -% affiliation. - -\institute[Universities of Somewhere and Elsewhere] % (optional, but mostly needed) -{ - \inst{1}% - Department of Computer Science\\ - University of Somewhere - \and - \inst{2}% - Department of Theoretical Philosophy\\ - University of Elsewhere} -% - Use the \inst command only if there are several affiliations. -% - Keep it simple, no one is interested in your street address. - -\date[CFP 2003] % (optional, should be abbreviation of conference name) -{Conference on Fabulous Presentations, 2003} -% - Either use conference name or its abbreviation. -% - Not really informative to the audience, more for people (including -% yourself) who are reading the slides online - -\subject{Theoretical Computer Science} -% This is only inserted into the PDF information catalog. Can be left -% out. - - - -% If you have a file called "university-logo-filename.xxx", where xxx -% is a graphic format that can be processed by latex or pdflatex, -% resp., then you can add a logo as follows: - -% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename} -% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}} - - - -% Delete this, if you do not want the table of contents to pop up at -% the beginning of each subsection: -\AtBeginSubsection[] -{ - \begin{frame}{Outline} - \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] - \end{frame} -} - - -% If you wish to uncover everything in a step-wise fashion, uncomment -% the following command: - -%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame} - \titlepage -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Outline} - \tableofcontents - % You might wish to add the option [pausesections] -\end{frame} - - -% Structuring a talk is a difficult task and the following structure -% may not be suitable. Here are some rules that apply for this -% solution: - -% - Exactly two or three sections (other than the summary). -% - At *most* three subsections per section. -% - Talk about 30s to 2min per frame. So there should be between about -% 15 and 30 frames, all told. - -% - A conference audience is likely to know very little of what you -% are going to talk about. So *simplify*! -% - In a 20min talk, getting the main ideas across is hard -% enough. Leave out details, even if it means being less precise than -% you think necessary. -% - If you omit details that are vital to the proof/implementation, -% just say so once. Everybody will be happy with that. - -\section{Motivation} - -\subsection{The Basic Problem That We Studied} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative. Use Uppercase Letters.}{Subtitles are optional.} - % - A title should summarize the slide in an understandable fashion - % for anyone how does not follow everything on the slide itself. - - \begin{itemize} - \item - Use \texttt{itemize} a lot. - \item - Use very short sentences or short phrases. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} - - You can create overlays\dots - \begin{itemize} - \item using the \texttt{pause} command: - \begin{itemize} - \item - First item. - \pause - \item - Second item. - \end{itemize} - \item - using overlay specifications: - \begin{itemize} - \item<3-> - First item. - \item<4-> - Second item. - \end{itemize} - \item - using the general \texttt{uncover} command: - \begin{itemize} - \uncover<5->{\item - First item.} - \uncover<6->{\item - Second item.} - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Previous Work} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - - - -\section{Our Results/Contribution} - -\subsection{Main Results} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Basic Ideas for Proofs/Implementation} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - - - -\section*{Summary} - -\begin{frame}{Summary} - - % Keep the summary *very short*. - \begin{itemize} - \item - The \alert{first main message} of your talk in one or two lines. - \item - The \alert{second main message} of your talk in one or two lines. - \item - Perhaps a \alert{third message}, but not more than that. - \end{itemize} - - % The following outlook is optional. - \vskip0pt plus.5fill - \begin{itemize} - \item - Outlook - \begin{itemize} - \item - Something you haven't solved. - \item - Something else you haven't solved. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - - -% All of the following is optional and typically not needed. -\appendix -\section*{\appendixname} -\subsection*{For Further Reading} - -\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks] - \frametitle{For Further Reading} - - \begin{thebibliography}{10} - - \beamertemplatebookbibitems - % Start with overview books. - - \bibitem{Author1990} - A.~Author. - \newblock {\em Handbook of Everything}. - \newblock Some Press, 1990. - - - \beamertemplatearticlebibitems - % Followed by interesting articles. Keep the list short. - - \bibitem{Someone2000} - S.~Someone. - \newblock On this and that. - \newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100, - 2000. - \end{thebibliography} -\end{frame} - -\end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex deleted file mode 100644 index cf7d86018bb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,297 +0,0 @@ -% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% Ce fichier est un exemple d'exposé - -% - pour des conférences, -% - d'une durée approximative de 20 minutes, -% - avec un style ornemental. - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa -% -% En principe, ce fichier peut être redistribué et/ou modifié conformément -% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% Cependant, ce fichier est supposé comme étant un "exemple-type" qui peut être modifié -% selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu' -% "exemple-type" et non spécifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un -% package ou programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier librement et -% de modifier ce fichier et même d'effacer ce message de copyright. - - -\mode { - \usetheme{Warsaw} - % ou autre ... - - \setbeamercovered{transparent} - % ou autre chose (il est également possible de supprimer cette ligne) -} - - -\usepackage[french]{babel} -% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel} - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% or autre - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent être assortis. Si T1 -% ne paraît pas très esthétique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc. - - -\title[Titre court] % (facultatif, à utiliser uniquement si le titre de l'article est trop long) -{Très long titre qui prend de la place} - -\subtitle {ne compléter que si l'article possède un sous-titre} - -\author[Auteur, Lautre] % (facultatif, à utiliser seulement avec plusieurs auteurs) -{F.~Auteur\inst{1} \and S.~Lautre\inst{2}} -% - Composez les noms dans l'ordre dans lequel ils apparaîtrons dans l'article -% - Utilisez la commande \inst{?} uniquement si les auteurs ont des affiliations -% différentes. - -\institute[Universités de Quelque Part et d'Ailleurs] % (facultatif mais généralement nécessaire) -{ - \inst{1}% - Département d'Informatique\\ - Université de Quelque Part - \and - \inst{2}% - Département de Philosophie Théorique\\ - Université d'Ailleurs} -% - Utilisez la commande \inst uniquement s'il y a plusieurs affectations -% - Faîtes quelque chose de simple, personne ne s'intéresse à votre adresse - -\date[CFP 2006] % (facultatif, peut être une abréviation du nom de la conférence) -{Conférence sur les Fantastiques Présentations, 2006} -% - Utilisez à la fois le nom de la conférence et son abréviation. -% - N'a pas réellement d'importance pour l'assistance qui sera présente lors de la conférence, -% mais en a surtout pour les personnes (y compris vous-même) qui liront les transparents en ligne. - -\subject{La théorie de l'Informatique} -% Inséré uniquement dans la page d'information du fichier PDF. Peut être -% supprimé. - - - -% Si vous avez un fichier nommé "université-logo-nomfichier.xxx", où xxx -% est un format graphique accepté par latex ou pdflatex (comme par exemple .png), -% alors vous pouvez insérer votre logo ainsi : - -% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{le-logo}{université-logo-nomfichier} -% \logo{\pgfuseimage{le-logo}} - - - -% À supprimer si vous ne voulez pas que la table des matières apparaisse -% au début de chaque sous-section : - -\AtBeginSubsection[] { - \begin{frame}{Lignes directrices} - \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] - \end{frame} -} - -% Si vous souhaitez recouvrir vos transparents un à un, -% utilisez la commande suivante (pour plus d'info, voir la page 74 du manuel -% d'utilisation de Beamer (version 3.06) par Till Tantau) : - -%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame} - \titlepage -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Lignes directrices} - \tableofcontents - % Vous pouvez, si vous le souhaiter ajouter l'option [pausesections] -\end{frame} - - -% Structurer l'entretien est une tâche difficile et la structure suivante -% pourrait ne pas convenir. Voici quelques règles à appliquer pour cet -% exemple ci : - -% - Avoir exactement deux ou trois sections (autre que la table des matières). -% - Tout au plus trois sous-sections par section -% - Parlez approximativement entre 30 secondes et 2 minutes par transparent. Il -% devrait donc y avoir entre 15 et 30 transparents, tous ayant été commentés. - -% - Le public d'une conférence connaîtra probablement peu de chose sur le sujet -% que vous serez en train de traiter. Donc, *simplifiez* ! -% - Dans un exposé de 20 minutes, garder à l'esprit les idées principales est largement -% suffisant pour votre assistance. Laissez tomber certains détails, même s'ils vous -% semblent nécessaires. -% - Si vous omettez un détail qui est vital pour une preuve/mise en oeuvre, -% dites le simplement une fois. Ce sera suffisant pour tout le monde. - -\section{Motivation} - -\subsection{Le problème étudié} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.}{Les sous-titres sont facultatifs.} - % - Le titre doit résumer le transparent dans un langage compréhensible - % par tous ceux qui ne suivront rien de ce qu'il y a sur ce transparent. - - \begin{itemize} - \item Utilisez \texttt{itemize} à volonté. - \item Utilisez des phrases très courtes et de courtes expressions. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent} - - Vous pouvez créer des recouvrements\dots - \begin{itemize} - \item en utilisant la commande \texttt{pause} : - \begin{itemize} - \item - Premier item. - \pause - \item - Second item. - \end{itemize} - \item - en utilisant les spécifications des recouvrements - \begin{itemize} - \item<3-> - Premier item. - \item<4-> - Second item. - \end{itemize} - \item - en utilisant en général la commande \texttt{uncover} : - \begin{itemize} - \uncover<5->{\item - Premier item.} - \uncover<6->{\item - Second item.} - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Travail préalable} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment super ! -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment génial ! -\end{frame} - - - -\section{Nos résultats/contribution} - -\subsection{Principaux résultats} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - {\scshape Beamer} possèdent plusieurs thèmes différents... -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - Merci à Till Tantau pour {\scshape Beamer} et son manuel. -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - Toute la puissance de \LaTeX{} pour créer des présentations. -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Idées de bases pour les preuves} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - Une idée... -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - Une autre... -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - Et une dernière... -\end{frame} - - - -\section*{Résumé} - -\begin{frame}{Résumé} - - % Faîtes un résumé *très court*. - \begin{itemize} - \item - Le \alert{premier message principal} de l'exposé en une ligne ou - deux. - \item - Le \alert{deuxième message principal} de l'exposé en une ligne ou - deux. - \item - Peut-être un \alert{troisième message}, mais pas plus que ça. - \end{itemize} - - % Les perspectives suivantes sont facultatives. - \vskip0pt plus.5fill - \begin{itemize} - \item - Perspectives - \begin{itemize} - \item - Problème non résolu. - \item - Autre problème non résolu. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - - -% Tout ce qui suit est facultatif et n'est typiquement pas nécessaire. -\appendix -\section*{\appendixname} -\subsection*{Lectures complémentaires} - -\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks] - \frametitle{Lectures complémentaires} - - \begin{thebibliography}{10} - - \beamertemplatebookbibitems - % Commencer avec des livres (image d'un livre insérée) - - \bibitem{Auteur1990} - A.~Auteur. - \newblock {\em Livre de quelque chose}. - \newblock Une Edition, 1990. - - - \beamertemplatearticlebibitems - % Et continuer avec les articles (image d'un article incluse). Faîtes une liste brève. - - \bibitem{Quelqu'un2000} - S.~Quelqu'un. - \newblock Et ceci et cela. - \newblock {\em Journal de ceci et cela}, 2(1):50--100, - 2000. - \end{thebibliography} -\end{frame} - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8c208c75032 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified +% +% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or +% 2. under the GNU Public License. +% +% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. + +% $Header$ + +% This file is a demonstration on how a foils file should be +% changed to make it work with beamer. + +% Copyright notice: + +% Since foiltex has a restricted license, I'm not able to include an +% original example from foiltex. Instead, I'm providing a simple +% example that shows the basic usage. + + +\documentclass{beamer} +\usepackage{beamerfoils} +\beamertemplatetheoremsnumbered + +\title{A Foils-To-Beamer Example} + +\author{Till Tantau} + +\MyLogo{\tiny-- Typeset by beamer emulation of \FoilTeX\ --} + +\leftheader{Till Tantau} + +\begin{document} + +\frame{ +\maketitle +} + +\foilhead{A first frame} + +Some text. + +\pagebreak + +More text on next slide. + +\foilhead{A third frame} + +Some text. + +\endfoil +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4e8ba17d19d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified +% +% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or +% 2. under the GNU Public License. +% +% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. + +% $Header$ + +\documentclass[notes]{beamer} + +% You might wish to try this instead of the above line: +%\documentclass[class=article]{beamer} +%\usepackage{beamerbasearticle} +%\usepackage{hyperref} + +\usepackage[framesassubsections]{beamerprosper} + +\mode +{ + \definecolor{beamerstructure}{RGB}{43,79,112} + \definecolor{sidebackground}{RGB}{230,242,250} + \color{beamerstructure} + \usetheme{Goettingen} + \usepackage{times} + \userightsidebarcolortemplate{\color{sidebackground}} + \beamertemplateballitem +} + + +\title{A Beamer Presentation Using (HA-)Prosper Commands} +\subtitle{Subtitles Are Also Supported} +\author{Till Tantau} +\institution{The Institution is Mapped To Institute} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tsectionandpart{Introduction} + +\overlays{2}{ +\begin{slide}[trans=Glitter]{About this file} + \begin{itemstep} + \item + This is a beamer presentation. + \item + You can use the prosper and the HA-prosper syntax. + \item + This is done by mapping prosper and HA-prosper commands to beamer + commands. + \item + The emulation is by no means perfect. + \end{itemstep} +\end{slide} +} + + +\section{Second Section} + +\subsection{A subsection} + +\frame +{ + \frametitle{A frame created using the \texttt{frame} command.} + + \begin{itemize}[<+->] + \item You can still use the original beamer syntax. + \item The emulation is intended only to make recycling slides + easier, not to install a whole new syntax for beamer. + \end{itemize} +} + +\begin{notes}{Notes for these slides} +My notes for these slides. +\end{notes} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..10f3407d41c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex @@ -0,0 +1,331 @@ +% $Header$ + +% This file is a demonstration on how a seminar file should be +% changed to make it work with beamer. + + +% Copyright notice: + +% Except for the changes indicated by CHANGED, this file is the original +% file semsamp2.tex, which is part of the examples of the seminar +% package. + + +%% BEGIN semsamp2.tex +% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later). +% +% This file contains both landscape and portrait mode slides. +% Choose one of the following to print them out: +% - If using PSTricks, try the semcolor style option. +% - If using Rokicki's dvips, try the semrot style option. +% - To print the landscape slides, put \landscapeonly in the preamble. +% To print the portrait slides, include the portrait style option and +% put \portraitonly in the preamble. +% +% + +% CHANGED: commented the following: +%\documentstyle[% +% slidesonly,% Try notes or notesonly instead. +% %notes,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset the notes. +% %notesonly,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset notes and slides. +% %semcolor,% Try me if using PSTricks. +% %semrot,% Try me if using Rokicki's dvips. +% %semhelv,% Try me if using a PostScript printer. +% %article,% Try me. +% %portrait,% Try me. +% %sem-a4,% Try me if using A4 paper. +% semlayer% This must be included, but you need the semcolor option to +% ]{seminar} % actually see the overlays. +% +%\slidesmag{5} +%\articlemag{1} +% +%%\twoup % Try me for twoup printing. +% +%%\portraitonly % To print only portrait slides +%%\landscapeonly % To print only landscape slides +% +%%\notslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: The slides are omitted. +%%\onlyslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: Only these slides are included. +%%\onlynotestoo %Try me: For selecting notes as well. +% +%\colorlayers{red,blue} % Try deleting this if using the semcolor option, +% % to get \blue and \red to use PostScript color. +% +%%\overlaysfalse % Suppress overlays with semcolor option. +%%\layersfalse % Suppress color layers with semcolor option. +% +%\rotateheaderstrue % Try this out if using rotation macros. + +% CHANGED: Added following three lines: +\documentclass[ignorenonframetext]{beamer} +\usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar} + % remove ``accumulated'' option + % for original behaviour +\usepackage{beamerthemeclassic} + +\title{Example for seminar.sty} +\author{Policarpa Salabarrieta} +\date{July 21, 1991} + +\newcommand{\sref}[1]{SLIDE \ref{#1}} + +% CHANGED: different definition of \heading +%\newcommand{\heading}[1]{\begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}} +\let\heading=\frametitle + +% CHANGED: Commented: +%\newpagestyle{MH}% +% {University of Guaduas, March 13, 1998\hfil\thepage}{} +%\pagestyle{MH} + +\begin{document} + +% CHANGED: Added \frame +\frame{ +\maketitle % This won't show up when \onlynotestoo is in effect. +} + +% CHANGED: Commented +%\begin{slide} +% \ifslidesonly % Title slide only for slidesonly selection. +% \maketitle +% \addtocounter{slide}{-1} +% \slidepagestyle{empty} +% \fi +%\end{slide} + + +This is a lot of gobbledy-gook intended only to illustrate some of the +features of seminar.sty. + + The phrase information overload rings a bell with just about anyone. +Certainly you all receive more working papers or more applications for +graduate school than you can readily read. Nevertheless, the term information +overload is ill-defined. (\sref{too_much}, top) + + A message like this when you check your email conjures up the notion of +information overload. More generally, information overload always means too +much information, in some sense or another. But what does ``too much'' mean? +(\sref{too_much}, bottom) It might just mean that people cannot process all +the information they receive. That is certainly true for everyone. A claim +that is much stronger, and that is implicit when people complain about +information overload, is that people {\em should} receive less information, by +some criterion. + +% CHANGED: Added \frame +\frame{ +\begin{slide}\label{too_much}% +\begin{center} + \large\bf + Information overload = ``Too much'' information +\end{center} +\smallskip + +\begin{verse} \bf\tt + You have 134 unread messages:\\ + Do you want to read them now? +\end{verse} + +\begin{enumerate} + {\overlay2 + \item People {\overlay1 cannot process all} the information they receive.} + \item People {\em should} receive less information. + \end{enumerate} +\end{slide} +} + + In this paper, I use the term ``information overload'' in both senses. +(\sref{overload}, bottom). Specifically, I say that an {\em individual} is +overloaded with information if she receives more information than she can +process. But I say that there is information overload in a {\em network} if +there is some mechanism that makes the senders and/or receivers better off by +restricting the flow of information. This latter notion of information +overload is an equilibrium property, and it depends on what we mean by +``better off.'' + +% CHANGED: Added \frame +\frame{ +\begin{slide*}\label{overload} +\ptsize{12} + +\begin{itemize}{\overlay1 + \item There is information {\overlay0 overload in a network if} there is +some mechanism that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders +and/or receivers better off by restricting the flow} of information.' + + \item There is information overload in a network if there is some mechanism +that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders and/or receivers +better off by restricting the flow of information. +\end{itemize} + +\end{slide*} +} + +(\sref{questions}) + The purpose of my paper is to show why there can be information overload in +a network and what kind of mechanisms can make the receivers and/or senders +better off. Since the cost of communication is one factor that restricts +communication, I am thus also going to look at how the welfare of the senders +and receivers depends on the cost of communication. + + Most messages don't become jumbled and we can choose which ones to process. +But some of us may have a bias towards choosing to process more information +than we should, like the graduate student who feels compelled to read every +article on the usual lengthy reading list, and just ends up getting confused +and ruffling through the papers. + +% CHANGED: Added \frame +\frame{ +\begin{slide}[7.3in,5.5in] \label{questions} +\heading{Questions} + +\begin{itemize} + {\overlay1\item When could {\blue there be overload} in networks?} + \item What mechanism make the receivers and senders better off? + \item How does the welfare {\red of the senders} and receivers depend on the +cost of communication? +\end{itemize} +\end{slide} +} + +However, experiments in consumer research and psychology have failed to find +that such a bias is prevalent. This is in spite of the fact that it is common +for stress and cognitive strain to increase with information load. We may +incur such stress and strain because the information we choose to process is +valuable to us. + +More commonly, then, we can and do choose to process roughly as much +information as we can handle efficiently. This is called screening. But when +we choose which messages to begin to process, we're ignorant of their +contents, since otherwise there would be no reason to process them in the +first place. Therefore, if we receive more junk mail, then some of the +important mail gets crowded out, and we are effectively less informed. + + +% CHANGED: Added \frame +\frame{ +\begin{slide} \label{informed} +\begin{center} + {\bf Being more informed} \par + \smallskip + is always better,\par + \medskip + \overlay1{but it's not the same as \par + \smallskip + {\bf receiving more information}} +\end{center} +\end{slide} +} + + Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I +present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to +ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most +want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with +information. Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that +sender will prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the +sender has an interest in which messages the receiver processes. +But when there are more senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the +messages of the other senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't +take this external cost into account when sending messages, they may +collectively overload the receiver. (\sref{akbar}) + +There are several reasons that our scarcity of attention, that is, our limited +capacity to process information, can mean that we become less informed when we +receive more information. I have a cartoon here to illustrate these reasons. +(\sref{akbar}) + +% CHANGED: Added \frame +\frame{ +\begin{slide}\label{akbar}\def\slidefuzz{15pt} + {\large A tax $\tau$ on communication is said to support +$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is an equilibrium for +$\Gamma(c+\tau)$.} +\medskip + + {\bf Proposition 6.} {\em Assume $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is not an equilibrium +for $\Gamma(c)$.\vspace{-3pt} +\begin{enumerate} + \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=[0,1]^n$, there is no tax that supports +$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$. + \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=S^{n-1}$, there is a tax that supports +$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if and only if $m=1$, $p_j>c\, \forall j$, and + \begin{enumerate} + \item $n=2$; or + \item $n=3$ and $p_i^{-1}+p_j^{-1}\geq p_k^{-1}$ for all distinct +$i,j,k$; or + \item $n=4$ and $p_1=p_2=p_3=p_4$. +\end{enumerate} +\end{enumerate}} +\end{slide} +} + If, by restricting communication, we eliminate the less relevant messages, +then we can become more informed. But how can we achieve this? Restricting the +flow of information shifts the task of screening messages from the receivers +to the senders. Unlike the receivers, the senders do know the contents of the +messages they originate. If the senders' interests coincide with those of the +receiver and if the senders have sufficient knowledge about the receivers, +then the senders will choose the messages which are most relevant to the +receivers. This may make the receivers, and even the senders, better off. + + The network in Slide \ref{architectures} attains the minimal delay $c(8,24) += 6$ using 8 processors. It is an example of the efficient one-shot networks +described by Foo. We will focus on a class of networks that are similar to the +Foo networks but that may differ slightly. For $q$, $c$ and $n$ such that $1 +\leq q \leq \lfloor n/2 \rfloor$ and $c(q,n) \leq c \leq n$, let $R_{nqc}$ be +the class of essential networks for adding $n$ items using $q$ processors in +$c$ cycles that have the following properties: + +% CHANGED: Added \frame +\frame{ +\begin{slide*}\label{architectures} +\heading{Architecture} + +\begin{center} +\setlength{\unitlength}{1.65in} +\begin{picture}(1.1,1.6)(3.5,5.0) +\put(4.0,6.5){\circle*{.04}} +\put(4.1,6.5){1} +\put(4.0,6.0){\circle*{.04}} +\put(4.1,6.0){2} +\put(4.0,6.1){\vector(0,1){.3}} +\put(3.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}} +\put(3.6,6.0){3} +\put(3.6,6.1){\vector(1,1){.3}} +\put(4.0,5.5){\circle*{.04}} +\put(4.1,5.5){4} +\put(4.0,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}} +\put(4.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}} +\put(4.6,6.0){5} +\put(4.4,6.1){\vector(-1,1){.3}} +\put(4.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}} +\put(4.6,5.5){6} +\put(4.4,5.6){\vector(-1,1){.3}} +\put(3.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}} +\put(3.6,5.5){7} +\put(3.5,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}} +\put(4.0,5.0){\circle*{.04}} +\put(4.1,5.0){8} +\put(4.0,5.1){\vector(0,1){.3}} +\end{picture} +\end{center} +\end{slide*} +} + +Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I +present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to +ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most +want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with +information. + +Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that sender will +prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the sender has +an interest in which messages the receiver processes. But when there are more +senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the messages of the other +senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't take this external cost +into account when sending messages, they may collectively overload the +receiver. (\sref{architectures}) + +\end{document} +%% END semsamp2.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..67fcdd15605 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex @@ -0,0 +1,271 @@ +% $Header$ + +% This file is a demonstration on how a seminar file should be +% changed to make it work with beamer. + + +% Copyright notice: + +% Except for the changes indicated by CHANGED, this file is the original +% file texpower-0.0.9d/doc/seminardemo.tex, which is part of the +% examples of the texpower package. + + + +% seminardemo.tex,v 1.2 2002/11/14 20:46:00 hansfn Exp +% +% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX +% Copyright (C) 1999-2002 Stephan Lehmke +% +% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License +% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 +% of the License, or (at your option) any later version. +% +% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +% GNU General Public License for more details. +% +%----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +% File: seminardemo.tex +% +% Simple examples the for combining the seminar class with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty. +% +%----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +% Autor: Stephan Lehmke +% +% v0.0.1 Jun 02, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower. +% + + +% CHANGED: commented +%\documentclass{seminar} +% +%% We need fixseminar for setting the page size correctly. +% +%\usepackage{fixseminar} +% +% +%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +%% The texpower package is loaded. +%% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled. +%% +%\usepackage[display]{texpower} + +% CHANGED: Added +\documentclass[slidestop,usepdftitle=false]{beamer} +\usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar} +\usepackage{beamertexpower} +\usepackage{beamerthemeshadow} + + +% CHANGED: Moved \title and \author outside of slide +\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\ {\normalfont \texttt{seminar} Demo}} +\author[Stephan Lehmke]{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke@cs.uni-dortmund.de}} + +\begin{document} +\begin{slide} + +\maketitle + +\newslide + +\tableofcontents +\end{slide} + +% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out, added \frametitle +\section{A list environment} +\frame{ +\begin{slide} +\centerslidesfalse +\frametitle{A list environment} + +% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which +% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages +% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation +% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to +% the next page. + +\pause + +% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For +% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step +% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the +% \step commands appear ``one by one''. + +\stepwise +{% + \begin{description} + \item[foo.] \step{bar.} + \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.} + \end{description} + } + + + +\end{slide} +} + +% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out +\section{An aligned equation} +\frame{ +\begin{slide} +\centerslidesfalse +\frametitle{An aligned equation} + +\pause + +% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb +% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step. +% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the +% proper amount of white space. + +\parstepwise +{% + % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only + % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation + % numbers `appear'. + \begin{eqnarray} + % + % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As + % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the + % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command. + % + \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\ + % + & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\ + % + & \step{=} & \restep + {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the + % order of appearance, independent of nesting. + % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on + % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'. + % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be + % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed. + \switch + {% + \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}% + (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)% + } + {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}% + } + \\ + % + % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by + % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator. + % + & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}} + \end{eqnarray} +} + + + + +\end{slide} +} + +% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out +\section{An array} +\frame{ +\begin{slide} + \centerslidesfalse + \frametitle{An array} + +\stepwise +{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths. + % + % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that + % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step, + % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning. + % + % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the + % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the + % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by + % a) using only p cells, + % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If + % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into + % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth. + % + \begin{displaymath} + \begin{array}{rrrrr} + \step + {% + n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\ + \hline% + }% + \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}% + \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}% + \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}% + \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}% + \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}% + \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }% + \end{array} + \end{displaymath} +} + + + + +\end{slide} +} + +% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out +\section{A picture} +\frame{ +\begin{slide} +\centerslidesfalse +\frametitle{A picture} + +\pause + +\begin{center}% + \stepwise + {% + \setlength{\unitlength}{1.5\semcm}% + \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces + \begin{picture}(14,2) + \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}} + \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}} + \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}} + \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}} + \step + { + \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}} + \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}} + \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}} + \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}} + } + \step + { + \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}} + \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}} + } + \step + { + \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}} + } + \step + { + \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}} + % + % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step. + % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of + % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for + % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces. + % + \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\footnotesize $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}} + } + \step + { + \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}} + \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}} + \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}} + \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}} + } + \end{picture}% + }% +\end{center}% +\end{slide} +} +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f5faef720e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex @@ -0,0 +1,744 @@ +% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified +% +% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or +% 2. under the GNU Public License. +% +% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. + + + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% +% DO NOT USE THIS FILE AS A TEMPLATE FOR YOUR OWN TALKS¡!! +% +% Use a file in the directory solutions instead. +% They are much better suited. +% + + +% Setup appearance: + +\usetheme{Darmstadt} +\usefonttheme[onlylarge]{structurebold} +\setbeamerfont*{frametitle}{size=\normalsize,series=\bfseries} +\setbeamertemplate{navigation symbols}{} + + +% Standard packages + +\usepackage[english]{babel} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + + +% Setup TikZ + +\usepackage{tikz} +\usetikzlibrary{arrows} +\tikzstyle{block}=[draw opacity=0.7,line width=1.4cm] + + +% Author, Title, etc. + +\title[Block Partitioning and Perfect Phylogenies] +{% + On the Complexity of SNP Block Partitioning Under the Perfect + Phylogeny Model% +} + +\author[Gramm, Hartman, Nierhoff, Sharan, Tantau] +{ + Jens~Gramm\inst{1} \and + Tzvika~Hartman\inst{2} \and + Till~Nierhoff\inst{3} \and + Roded~Sharan\inst{4} \and + \textcolor{green!50!black}{Till~Tantau}\inst{5} +} + +\institute[Tübingen and others] +{ + \inst{1}% + Universität Tübingen, Germany + \and + \vskip-2mm + \inst{2}% + Bar-Ilan University, Ramat-Gan, Israel + \and + \vskip-2mm + \inst{3}% + International Computer Science Institute, Berkeley, USA + \and + \vskip-2mm + \inst{4}% + Tel-Aviv University, Israel + \and + \vskip-2mm + \inst{5}% + Universität zu Lübeck, Germany +} + +\date[WABI 2006] +{Workshop on Algorithms in Bioinformatics, 2006} + + + +% The main document + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame} + \titlepage +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Outline} + \tableofcontents +\end{frame} + + +\section{Introduction} + +\subsection{The Model and the Problem} + +\begin{frame}{What is haplotyping and why is it important?} + You hopefully know this after the previous three talks\dots +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}[t]{General formalization of haplotyping.} + \begin{block}{Inputs} + \begin{itemize} + \item A \alert{genotype matrix} $G$. + \item The \alert{rows} of the matrix are \alert{taxa / individuals}. + \item The \alert{columns} of the matrix are \alert{SNP sites / + characters}. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} + \begin{block}{Outputs} + \begin{itemize} + \item A \alert{haplotype matrix} $H$. + \item Pairs of rows in $H$ \alert{explain} the rows of $G$. + \item The haplotypes in $H$ are \alert{biologically plausible}. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}[t]{Our formalization of haplotyping.} + \begin{block}{Inputs} + \begin{itemize} + \item A genotype matrix $G$. + \item The rows of the matrix are individuals / taxa. + \item The columns of the matrix are SNP sites / characters. + \item + The problem is directed: one haplotype is known. + \item + The input is biallelic: there are only two homozygous + states (0 and 1) and one heterozygous state (2). + \end{itemize} + \end{block} + \begin{block}{Outputs} + \begin{itemize} + \item A haplotype matrix $H$. + \item Pairs of rows in $H$ explain the rows of $G$. + \item The haplotypes in $H$ form a perfect phylogeny. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{We can do perfect phylogeny haplotyping efficiently, but + \dots} + \begin{enumerate} + \item \alert{Data may be missing.} + \begin{itemize} + \item This makes the problem NP-complete \dots + \item \dots even for very restricted cases. + \end{itemize} + \textcolor{green!50!black}{Solutions:} + \begin{itemize} + \item Additional assumption like the rich data hypothesis. + \end{itemize} + \item \alert{No perfect phylogeny is possible.} + \begin{itemize} + \item This can be caused by chromosomal crossing-over effects. + \item This can be caused by incorrect data. + \item This can be caused by multiple mutations at the same sites. + \end{itemize} + \textcolor{green!50!black}{Solutions:} + \begin{itemize} + \item Look for phylogenetic networks. + \item Correct data. + \item + Find blocks where a perfect phylogeny is possible. + \end{itemize} + \end{enumerate} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{The Integrated Approach} + +\begin{frame}{How blocks help in perfect phylogeny haplotyping.} + \begin{enumerate} + \item Partition the site set into overlapping contiguous blocks. + \item Compute a perfect phylogeny for each block and combine them. + \item Use dynamic programming for finding the partition. + \end{enumerate} + + \begin{tikzpicture} + \useasboundingbox (0,-1) rectangle (10,2); + + \draw[line width=2mm,dash pattern=on 1mm off 1mm] + (0,1) -- (9.99,1) node[midway,above] {Genotype matrix} + (0,0.6666) -- (9.99,0.6666) + (0,0.3333) -- (9.99,0.3333) + (0,0) -- (9.99,0) node[midway,below] {\only<1>{no perfect phylogeny}}; + + \begin{scope}[xshift=-.5mm] + \only<2-> + { + \draw[red,block] (0,.5) -- (3,.5) + node[midway,below] {perfect phylogeny}; + } + + \only<3-> + { + \draw[green!50!black,block] (2.5,.5) -- (7,.5) + node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny}; + } + + \only<4-> + { + \draw[blue,block] (6.5,.5) -- (10,.5) + node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny}; + } + \end{scope} + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Objective of the integrated approach.} + \begin{enumerate} + \item Partition the site set into \alert{noncontiguous} blocks. + \item Compute a perfect phylogeny for each block and combine them. + \item Compute partition while computing perfect + phylogenies. + \end{enumerate} + + \begin{tikzpicture} + \useasboundingbox (0,-1) rectangle (10,2); + + \draw[line width=2mm,dash pattern=on 1mm off 1mm] + (0,1) -- (9.99,1) node[midway,above] {Genotype matrix} + (0,0.6666) -- (9.99,0.6666) + (0,0.3333) -- (9.99,0.3333) + (0,0) -- (9.99,0) node[midway,below] {\only<1>{no perfect phylogeny}}; + + \only<2-> + { + \begin{scope}[xshift=-0.5mm] + \draw[red,block] (0,.5) -- (3,.5) + node[midway,below] {perfect phylogeny} + (8,.5) -- (9,.5); + + \draw[green!50!black,block] + (3,.5) -- (6,.5) + node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny} + (6.4,.5) -- (8,.5) + (9,.5) -- (10,.5); + + \draw[blue,block] (6,.5) -- (6.4,.5) + node[midway,below=5mm] {perfect phylogeny}; + \end{scope} + } + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{The formal computational problem.} + We are interested in the computational complexity of \\ + \alert{the function \alert{$\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}$}}: + \begin{itemize} + \item It gets genotype matrices as input. + \item It maps them to a number $k$. + \item This number is minimal such that the sites can be + covered by $k$ sets, each admitting a perfect phylogeny. + \\ + (We call this a \alert{pp-partition}.) + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\section{Bad News: Hardness Results} + +\subsection{Hardness of PP-Partitioning of Haplotype Matrices} + +\begin{frame}{Finding pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.} + We start with a special case: + \begin{itemize} + \item The inputs $M$ are \alert{already haplotype matrices}. + \item The inputs $M$ \alert{do not allow a perfect phylogeny}. + \item What is $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M)$? + \end{itemize} + \begin{example} + \begin{columns} + \column{.3\textwidth} + $M\colon$ + \footnotesize + \begin{tabular}{cccc} + 0 & 0 & 0 & 1 \\ + 0 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\ + 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\ + 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 1 & 0 & 1 \\ + 1 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 0 & 1 & 0 \\ + 1 & 0 & 1 & 0 + \end{tabular}% + \only<2> + {% + \begin{tikzpicture} + \useasboundingbox (2.9,0); + + \draw [red, opacity=0.7,line width=1cm] (1.7 ,1.9) -- (1.7 ,-1.7); + \draw [blue,opacity=0.7,line width=5mm] (0.85,1.9) -- (0.85,-1.7) + (2.55,1.9) -- (2.55,-1.7); + \end{tikzpicture} + } + \column{.6\textwidth} + \begin{overprint} + \onslide<1> + No perfect phylogeny is possible. + + \onslide<2> + \textcolor{blue!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny} + + \textcolor{red!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny} + + $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$. + + \end{overprint} + \end{columns} + \end{example} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Bad news about pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.} + \begin{theorem} + Finding \alert{optimal pp-partition of haplotype matrices}\\ + is equivalent to finding \alert{optimal graph colorings}. + \end{theorem} + + \begin{proof}[Proof sketch for first direction] + \begin{enumerate} + \item Let $G$ be a graph. + \item Build a matrix with a column for each vertex of $G$. + \item For each edge of $G$ add four rows inducing\\the + submatrix $\left( + \begin{smallmatrix} + 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 1 \\ + 1 & 0 \\ + 1 & 1 + \end{smallmatrix}\right)$. + \item The submatrix enforces that the columns lie in different + perfect phylogenies. \qedhere + \end{enumerate} + \end{proof} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Implications for pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.} + \begin{corollary} + If $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$ for a haplotype matrix $M$, + we can find an optimal pp-partition in polynomial time. + \end{corollary} + + \begin{corollary} + Computing $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}$ for haplotype matrices is + \begin{itemize} + \item $\operatorname{NP}$-hard, + \item not fixed-parameter tractable, unless + $\operatorname{P}=\operatorname{NP}$, + \item very hard to approximate. + \end{itemize} + \end{corollary} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Hardness of PP-Partitioning of Genotype Matrices} + + +\begin{frame}{Finding pp-partitions of genotype matrices.} + Now comes the general case: + \begin{itemize} + \item The inputs $M$ are \alert{genotype matrices}. + \item The inputs $M$ \alert{do not allow a perfect phylogeny}. + \item What is $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M)$? + \end{itemize} + \begin{example} + \begin{columns} + \column{.3\textwidth} + $M\colon$ + \footnotesize + \begin{tabular}{cccc} + 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 \\ + 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 0 & 0 & 1 \\ + 0 & 0 & 1 & 0 \\ + 0 & 2 & 2 & 0 \\ + 1 & 1 & 0 & 0 + \end{tabular}% + \only<2> + {% + \begin{tikzpicture} + \useasboundingbox (2.9,0); + + \draw [red, opacity=0.7,line width=1cm] (1.7 ,1.3) -- (1.7 ,-1.1); + \draw [blue,opacity=0.7,line width=5mm] (0.85,1.3) -- (0.85,-1.1) + (2.55,1.3) -- (2.55,-1.1); + \end{tikzpicture} + } + \column{.6\textwidth} + \begin{overprint} + \onslide<1> + No perfect phylogeny is possible. + + \onslide<2> + \textcolor{blue!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny} + + \textcolor{red!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny} + + $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$. + + \end{overprint} + \end{columns} + \end{example} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{Bad news about pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.} + \begin{theorem} + Finding \alert{optimal pp-partition of genotype matrices} + is at least as hard as finding \alert{optimal colorings of + 3-uniform hypergraphs}. + \end{theorem} + + \begin{proof}[Proof sketch] + \begin{enumerate} + \item Let $G$ be a 3-uniform hypergraph. + \item Build a matrix with a column for each vertex of $G$. + \item For each hyperedge of $G$ add four rows inducing\\ the submatrix + $\left( + \begin{smallmatrix} + 2 & 2 & 2 \\ + 1 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 1 & 0 \\ + 0 & 0 & 1 + \end{smallmatrix}\right) + $. + \item The submatrix enforces that the three columns do not all lie + in the same perfect phylogeny. \qedhere + \end{enumerate} + \end{proof} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Implications for pp-partitions of genotype matrices.} + \begin{corollary} + Even if we know $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$ for a genotype matrix $M$,\\ + finding a pp-partition of any fixed size is still + \begin{itemize} + \item $\operatorname{NP}$-hard, + \item not fixed-parameter tractable, unless + $\operatorname{P}=\operatorname{NP}$, + \item very hard to approximate. + \end{itemize} + \end{corollary} +\end{frame} + + +\section{Good News: Tractability Results} + +\subsection{Perfect Path Phylogenies} + +\begin{frame}{Automatic optimal pp-partitioning is hopeless, but\dots} + \begin{itemize} + \item The hardness results are \alert{worst-case} results for\\ + \alert{highly artificial inputs}. + \item \alert{Real biological data} might have special properties + that make the problem \alert{tractable}. + \item One such property is that perfect phylogenies are often + perfect \alert{path} phylogenies: + + In HapMap data, in 70\% of the blocks where a perfect phylogeny + is possible a perfect path phylogeny is also possible. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{Example of a perfect path phylogeny.} + \begin{columns}[t] + \column{.3\textwidth} + \begin{exampleblock}{Genotype matrix} + $G\colon$ + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + A & B & C \\\hline + 2 & 2 & 2 \\ + 0 & 2 & 0 \\ + 2 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 2 & 2 + \end{tabular} + \end{exampleblock} + + \column{.3\textwidth} + \begin{exampleblock}{Haplotype matrix} + $H\colon$ + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + A & B & C \\\hline + 1 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 1 & 1 \\ + 0 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 1 & 0 \\ + 0 & 0 & 0 \\ + 1 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 0 & 0 \\ + 0 & 1 & 1 + \end{tabular} + \end{exampleblock} + + \column{.4\textwidth} + \begin{exampleblock}{Perfect path phylogeny} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[auto,thick] + \tikzstyle{node}=% + [% + minimum size=10pt,% + inner sep=0pt,% + outer sep=0pt,% + ball color=example text.fg,% + circle% + ] + + \node [node] {} [->] + child {node [node] {} edge from parent node[swap]{A}} + child {node [node] {} + child {node [node] {} edge from parent node{C}} + edge from parent node{B} + }; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{exampleblock} + \end{columns} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{The modified formal computational problem.} + We are interested in the computational complexity of \\ + the function $\chi_{\alert{\operatorname{PPP}}}$: + \begin{itemize} + \item It gets genotype matrices as input. + \item It maps them to a number $k$. + \item This number is minimal such that the sites can be + covered by $k$ sets, each admitting a perfect \alert{path} phylogeny. + \\ + (We call this a ppp-partition.) + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + + +\subsection{Tractability of PPP-Partitioning of Genotype Matrices} + +\begin{frame}{Good news about ppp-partitions of genotype matrices.} + \begin{theorem} + \alert{Optimal ppp-partitions of genotype matrices} can be + computed in \alert{polynomial time}. + \end{theorem} + \begin{block}{Algorithm} + \begin{enumerate} + \item Build the following partial order: + \begin{itemize} + \item Can one column be above the other in a phylogeny? + \item Can the columns be the two children of the root of a + perfect path phylogeny? + \end{itemize} + \item Cover the partial order with as few compatible chain pairs + as possible. + + For this, a maximal matching in a special graph needs to be + computed. + \end{enumerate} + \end{block} + \hyperlink{algorithm<1>}{\beamergotobutton{The algorithm in action}} + \hypertarget{return}{} +\end{frame} + +\section*{Summary} + +\begin{frame} + \frametitle{Summary} + + \begin{itemize} + \item + Finding optimal pp-partitions is \alert{intractable}. + \item + It is even intractable to find a pp-partition when \alert{just two + noncontiguous blocks are known to suffice}. + \item + For perfect \alert{path} phylogenies, optimal partitions can be + computed \alert{in polynomial time}. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\appendix + +\section*{Appendix} + +\begin{frame}[label=algorithm]{The algorithm in action.}{Computation of + the partial order.} + \begin{columns}[t] + \column{.4\textwidth} + \begin{exampleblock}{Genotype matrix} + $G\colon$ + \begin{tabular}{ccccc} + A & B & C & D & E \\\hline + 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 \\ + 0 & 1 & 2 & 1 & 0 \\ + 1 & 0 & 0 & 1 & 2 \\ + 0 & 2 & 2 & 0 & 0 + \end{tabular} + \end{exampleblock} + \column{.6\textwidth} + \begin{exampleblock}{Partial order} + \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm] + \tikzstyle{every node}= + [% + fill=green!50!black!20,% + draw=green!50!black,% + minimum size=7mm,% + circle,% + thick% + ] + + \node (A) {A}; + \node (B) [right of=A] {B}; + \node (C) [below of=B] {C}; + \node (D) [above of=A] {D}; + \node (E) [below of=A] {E}; + + \path [thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth'] (A) edge (E) + (B) edge (C) + (D) edge (A) + edge[bend right] (E); + + \uncover<2>{ + \path [-,blue,thick](A) edge (B) + edge (C) + (B) edge (E) + (C) edge (E);} + \end{tikzpicture} + + Partial order: \tikz[baseline] \draw[thick,-stealth'] (0pt,.5ex) + -- (5mm,.5ex); + + \uncover<2>{\textcolor{blue}{Compatible as children of root: + \tikz[baseline] \draw[thick] (0pt,.5ex) -- (5mm,.5ex);}} + \end{exampleblock} + \end{columns} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{The algorithm in action.}{The matching in the special graph.} + \begin{columns}[t] + \column{.3\textwidth} + \begin{exampleblock}{Partial order} + \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm] + \tikzstyle{every node}=% + [% + fill=green!50!black!20,% + draw=green!50!black,% + minimum size=8mm,% + circle,% + thick% + ] + + \node (A) {$A$}; + \node (B) [right of=A] {$B$}; + \node (C) [below of=B] {$C$}; + \node (D) [above of=A] {$D$}; + \node (E) [below of=A] {$E$}; + + \path [thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth'] (A) edge (E) + (B) edge (C) + (D) edge (A) + edge[bend right] (E); + + \path [-,blue,thick](A) edge (B) + edge (C) + (B) edge (E) + (C) edge (E); + + \only<3-> + { + \path[very thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth',red] (D) edge (A) (B) edge (C); + \path [-,red,very thick](E) edge (B); + } + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{exampleblock} + \column{.7\textwidth} + \begin{exampleblock}{Matching graph} + \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm] + \tikzstyle{every node}=% + [% + fill=green!50!black!20,% + draw=green!50!black,% + minimum size=8mm,% + circle,% + thick,% + inner sep=0pt% + ] + + \node (A) {$A$}; + \node (B) [right of=A] {$B$}; + \node (C) [below of=B] {$C$}; + \node (D) [above of=A] {$D$}; + \node (E) [below of=A] {$E$}; + + \begin{scope}[xshift=4.75cm] + \node (A') {$A'$}; + \node (B') [right of=A'] {$B'$}; + \node (C') [below of=B'] {$C'$}; + \node (D') [above of=A'] {$D'$}; + \node (E') [below of=A'] {$E'$}; + \end{scope} + + \path [thick] (A) edge (E') + (B) edge (C') + (D) edge (A') + edge (E'); + + \path [blue,thick](A') edge (B') + edge (C') + (B') edge (E') + (C') edge (E'); + + \only<2-> + { + \path[very thick,red] (D) edge (A') + (B) edge (C') + (B') edge (E'); + } + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{exampleblock} + \end{columns} + + \medskip + \uncover<2->{A \alert{maximal matching} in the matching graph + \uncover<3>{induces\\ \alert{perfect path phylogenies}.}} + + \hfill\hyperlink{return}{\beamerreturnbutton{Return}} +\end{frame} + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dbda07c3ab7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified +% +% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or +% 2. under the GNU Public License. +% +% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. + +\documentclass[german,10pt]{beamer} + +\input{beamerexample-lecture-style.tex} +\input{beamerexample-lecture-body.tex} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5d472951be4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex @@ -0,0 +1,587 @@ +% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified +% +% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or +% 2. under the GNU Public License. +% +% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. + +% +% DO NOT USE THIS FILE AS A TEMPLATE FOR YOUR OWN TALKS¡!! +% +% Use a file in the directory solutions instead. +% They are much better suited. +% + + +\lecture[1]{Syntax versus Semantik}{lecture-text} + +\subtitle{Text und seine Bedeutung} + +\date{27. Oktober 2006} + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame} + \maketitle +\end{frame} + + +\section*{Ziele und Inhalt} + +\begin{frame}{Die Lernziele der heutigen Vorlesung und der Übungen.} + \begin{enumerate} + \item Die Begriffe Syntax und Semantik erklären können + \item Syntaktische und semantische Elemente natürlicher Sprachen und + von Programmiersprachen benennen können + \item Die Begriffe Alphabet und Wort kennen + \item Objekte als Worte kodieren können + \end{enumerate} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}\frametitle{Gliederung} + \tableofcontents +\end{frame} + + +\section{Was ist Syntax?} + +\begin{frame}{Die zwei Hauptbegriffe der heutigen Vorlesung.} + \begin{block}{Grobe Definition (Syntax)} + Unter einer \alert{Syntax} verstehen wir \alert{Regeln}, nach denen + Texte \alert{strukturiert} werden dürfen. + \end{block} + \begin{block}{Grobe Definition (Semantik)} + Unter einer \alert{Semantik} verstehen wir die Zuordnung von + \alert{Bedeutung} zu Text. + \end{block} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection[Syntax \protect\\ natürlicher Sprachen]{Syntax natürlicher Sprachen} + +\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem ägyptischen Text.} + \includegraphicscopyright[width=6cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg} + {Copyright by Guillaume Blanchard, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resultion} + + \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} + \begin{itemize} + \item Wir haben keine Ahnung, was der Text bedeutet. + \item Es gibt aber \alert{Regeln}, die offenbar eingehalten wurden, + wie »Hieroglyphen stehen in Zeilen«. + \item Solche Regeln sind \alert{syntaktische Regeln} -- man kann sie + überprüfen, ohne den Inhalt zu verstehen. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem kyrillischen Text.} + + \includegraphicscopyright[width=6.75cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg} + {Copyright by Cristian Chirita, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resultion} + + \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} + \begin{itemize} + \item Wir haben keine Ahnung, was der Text bedeutet. + \item Es gibt aber \alert{Regeln}, die offenbar eingehalten wurden. + \item Wir kennen mehr Regeln als bei den Hieroglyphen. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} + + \begin{block}{Zur Diskussion} + Welche syntaktischen Regeln fallen Ihnen ein, die bei dem Text + eingehalten wurden? + \end{block} +\end{frame} + + + +\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem deutschen Text.} + \begin{quotation} + Informatiker lieben Logiker. + \end{quotation} + + \bigskip + \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} + \begin{itemize} + \item Auch hier werden viele syntaktische Regeln eingehalten. + \item Es fällt uns aber \alert{schwerer}, diese zu erkennen. + \item Der Grund ist, dass wir \alert{sofort über die Bedeutung + nachdenken}. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von natürlichen Sprachen.} + \begin{itemize} + \item + Die \alert{Syntax} einer natürlichen Sprache ist die Menge an + \alert{Regeln}, nach denen Sätze gebildet werden dürfen. + \item + Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der gebildeten Sätze + ist dabei unerheblich. + \item + Jede Sprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax verschiedener + Sprachen ähneln sich aber oft. + \item + Es ist nicht immer klar, ob eine Regel noch zur Syntax gehört + oder ob es schon um den Sinn geht. + + \ExampleInline{Substantive werden groß geschrieben.} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\subsection{Syntax von Programmiersprachen} + +\begin{frame}[fragile]{Beobachtungen zu einem Programmtext.} + +\begin{verbatim} +\def\pgfpointadd#1#2{% + \pgf@process{#1}% + \pgf@xa=\pgf@x% + \pgf@ya=\pgf@y% + \pgf@process{#2}% + \advance\pgf@x by\pgf@xa% + \advance\pgf@y by\pgf@ya} +\end{verbatim} + \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} + \begin{itemize} + \item Der Programmtext sieht sehr kryptisch aus. + \item Trotzdem gibt es offenbar wieder Regeln. + \item So scheint einem Doppelkreuz eine Ziffer zu folgen und + Zeilen muss man offenbar mit Prozentzeichen beenden. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}[fragile]{Beobachtungen zu einem weiteren Programmtext.} + +\begin{verbatim} +for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) + a[i] = a[i]; +\end{verbatim} + \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} + \begin{itemize} + \item Wieder gibt es Regeln, die eingehalten werden. + \item Wieder fällt es uns \alert{schwerer}, diese zu erkennen, da + wir \alert{sofort über den Sinn nachdenken}. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von Programmiersprachen} + \begin{itemize} + \item Die \alert{Syntax} einer Programmiersprache ist die + \alert{Menge von Regeln}, nach der Programmtexte gebildet werden + dürfen. + \item Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der Programmtexte + ist dabei egal. + \item + Jede Programmiersprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax + verschiedener Sprachen ähneln sich aber oft. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{5-Minuten-Aufgabe} + Welche der folgenden Regeln sind Syntax-Regeln? + \begin{enumerate} + \item Bezeichner dürfen nicht mit einer Ziffer anfangen. + \item Programme müssen in endlicher Zeit ein Ergebnis produzieren. + \item Öffnende und schließende geschweifte Klammern müssen + »balanciert« sein. + \item Methoden von Null-Objekten dürfen nicht aufgerufen werden. + \item Variablen müssen vor ihrer ersten Benutzung deklariert werden. + \end{enumerate} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection[Syntax\protect\\ logischer Sprachen]{Syntax logischer Sprachen} + +\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einer logischen Formel.} + \begin{quotation} + $p \to q \land \neg q$ + \end{quotation} + + \bigskip + \begin{block}{Beobachtungen} + \begin{itemize} + \item Auch logische Formeln haben eine syntaktische Struktur. + \item So wäre es \alert{syntaktisch falsch}, statt einem Pfeil zwei + Pfeile zu benutzen. + \item Es wäre aber \alert{syntaktisch richtig}, statt einem + Negationszeichen zwei Negationszeichen zu verwenden. + \end{itemize} + \end{block} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von logischen Sprachen} + \begin{itemize} + \item Die \alert{Syntax} einer logischen Sprache ist die + \alert{Menge von Regeln}, nach der Formeln gebildet werden + dürfen. + \item Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der Formeln + ist dabei egal. + \item + Jede logische Sprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax + verschiedener Sprachen ähneln sich aber oft. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + + +\section{Was ist Semantik?} + +\subsection[Semantik\protect\\ natürlicher Sprachen]{Semantik natürlicher Sprachen} + +\begin{frame}{Was bedeutet ein Satz?} + + \begin{quotation} + Der Hörsaal ist groß. + \end{quotation} + + \bigskip + \begin{itemize} + \item Dieser Satz hat eine \alert{Bedeutung}. + \item Eine \alert{Semantik} legt solche Bedeutungen fest. + \item Syntaktisch falschen Sätzen wird im Allgemeinen keine + Bedeutung zugewiesen. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Ein Satz, zwei Bedeutungen.} + \begin{quotation} + Steter Tropfen höhlt den Stein. + \end{quotation} + + \bigskip + \begin{itemize} + \item Ein Satz kann \alert{mehrere Bedeutungen haben}, welche durch + \alert{unterschiedliche Semantiken} gegeben sind. + \item In der \alert{wortwörtlichen Semantik} sagt der Satz aus, dass + Steine ausgehöhlte werden, wenn man jahrelang Wasser auf + sie tropft. + \item In der \alert{übertragenen Semantik} sagt der Satz aus, dass + sich Beharrlichkeit auszahlt. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Die Semantik der Hieroglyphen} + \includegraphicscopyright[height=8cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg} + {Unknown Author, Public Domain, Low Resolution} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Semantik von Programmiersprachen} + +\begin{frame}[fragile]{Was bedeutet ein Programm?} +\begin{verbatim} +for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) + a[i] = a[i]; +\end{verbatim} + \begin{itemize} + \item Auch dieser Programmtext »bedeutet etwas«, wir »meinen etwas« + mit diesem Text. + \item Die \alert{Semantik der Programmiersprache} legt fest, + was mit dem Programmtext gemeint ist. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}[fragile]{Ein Programm, zwei Bedeutungen.} +\begin{verbatim} +for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++) + a[i] = a[i]; +\end{verbatim} + \begin{itemize} + \item Ein Programmtext kann \alert{mehrere Bedeutungen haben}, + welche durch \alert{unterschiedliche Semantiken} gegeben sind. + \item In der \alert{operationalen Semantik} bedeutet der + Programmtext, dass die ersten einhundert Elemente eines Arrays + \verb!a! nacheinander ihren eigenen Wert zugewiesen bekommen. + \item In der \alert{denotationellen Semantik} bedeutet der + Programmtext, dass nichts passiert. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection[Semantik\protect\\ logischer Sprachen]{Semantik logischer Sprachen} + + + + +\section{Grundlage der Syntax: Text} + +\begin{frame}{Eine mathematische Sicht auf Text.} + \begin{itemize} + \item Viele (aber nicht alle!) syntaktische Systeme bauen auf + \alert{Text} auf. + \item Auch solche Systeme, die nicht auf Text aufbauen, lassen sich + trotzdem durch Text beschreiben. + \item Es ist deshalb nützlich, auf Text \text{Methoden der + Mathematik} anwenden zu können. + \item Im Folgenden wird deshalb die \alert{mathematische Sicht} auf + Text eingeführt, die \alert{in der gesamten Theoretischen + Informatik} genutzt wird. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Alphabete} + +\begin{frame}{Formale Alphabete} + \begin{definition}[Alphabet] + Ein \alert{Alphabet} ist eine nicht-leere, endliche Menge von + \alert{Symbolen} (auch \alert{Buchstaben} genannt). + \end{definition} + + \begin{itemize} + \item Alphabete werden häufig mit griechischen Großbuchstaben + bezeichnet, also $\Gamma$ oder~$\Sigma$. Manchmal auch mit + lateinischen Großbuchstaben, also $N$ oder~$T$. + \item Ein Symbol oder »Buchstabe« kann auch ein komplexes oder + komisches »Ding« sein wie ein Pointer oder ein Leerzeichen. + \end{itemize} + + \begin{examples} + \begin{itemize} + \item Die Groß- und Kleinbuchstaben + \item Die Menge $\{0,1\}$ (bei Informatikern beliebt) + \item Die Menge $\{A,C,G,T\}$ (bei Biologen beliebt) + \item Die Zeichenmenge des UNICODE. + \end{itemize} + \end{examples} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Worte} + + +\begin{frame}{Formale Worte} + \begin{definition}[Wort] + Ein \alert{Wort} ist eine (endliche) Folge von Symbolen. + \end{definition} + \begin{itemize} + \item »Worte« sind im Prinzip dasselbe wie + Strings. Insbesondere können in Worten Leerzeichen als Symbole + auftauchen. + \item Die Menge aller Worte über einem Alphabet $\Sigma$ hat einen + besonderen Namen: $\Sigma^*$. + \item + Deshalb schreibt man oft: »Sei $w \in \Sigma^*$, \dots« + \item Es gibt auch ein \alert{leeres Wort}, abgekürzt + $\epsilon$ oder $\lambda$, das dem String + \texttt{\char`\"\char`\"} entspricht. + \end{itemize} + + \begin{examples} + \begin{itemize} + \item \texttt{Hallo} + \item \texttt{TATAAAATATTA} + \item $\epsilon$ + \item \texttt{Hallo Welt.} + \end{itemize} + \end{examples} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{5-Minuten-Aufgabe} + Die folgenden Aufgaben sind nach Schwierigkeit sortiert. Lösen Sie + \alert{eine} der Aufgaben. + \begin{enumerate} + \item + Schreiben Sie alle Worte der Länge höchstens $2$ über dem Alphabet + $\Sigma = \{0,1,*\}$ auf. + \item + Wie viele Worte der Länge $n$ über dem Alphabet $\Sigma = + \{0,1,*\}$ gibt es? + \item + Wie viele Worte der Länge höchstens $n$ über einem Alphabet mit + $q$ Buchstaben gibt es? + \end{enumerate} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Sprachen} + +\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen}{Definition} + \begin{itemize} + \item Natürlichen Sprachen sind komplexe Dinge, bestehend aus + Wörtern, ihrer Ausprache, einer Grammatik, Ausnahmen, Dialekten, + und vielem mehr. + \item Bei \alert{formalen Sprachen} vereinfacht man radikal. + \item Formale Sprachen müssen weder sinnvoll noch interessant sein. + \end{itemize} + + \begin{definition}[Formale Sprache] + Eine \alert{formale Sprache} ist eine (oft unendliche!) Menge von + Worten für ein festes Alphabet. + \end{definition} + + \begin{itemize} + \item Statt \frqq formale Sprache\flqq\ sagt man einfach \frqq Sprache\flqq. + \item Als Menge von Worten ist eine Sprache eine Teilmenge von + $\Sigma^*$. + \item + Deshalb schreibt man oft: \frqq Sei $L \subseteq \Sigma^*$, + \dots\flqq + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen}{Einfache Beispiele} + \begin{examples} + \begin{itemize} + \item Die Menge $\{AAA, AAC, AAT\}$ (endliche Sprache). + \item Die Menge aller Java-Programmtexte (unendliche Sprache). + \item Die Menge aller Basensequenzen, die \texttt{TATA} enthalten + (unendliche Sprache). + \end{itemize} + \end{examples} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik} + \begin{itemize} + \item Ein Renderer produziert 3D-Bilder. + \item Dazu erhält er eine \alert{Szenerie} als Eingabe. + \item Diese Szenerie ist als \alert{Text}, also als ein \alert{Wort} gegeben. + \item Eine \alert{Syntax} beschreibt die (formale) Sprache, die alle + \alert{syntaktisch korrekten Szenerien} enthält. + \item Eine \alert{Semantik} beschreibt, was diese Beschreibungen bedeuten. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{Das + »Wort«, das eine Szenerie beschreibt\dots} +\only{\scriptsize} +\begin{verbatim*} +global_settings { assumed_gamma 1.0 } + +camera { + location <10.0, 10, -10.0> + direction 1.5*z + right x*image_width/image_height + look_at <0.0, 0.0, 0.0> +} + +sky_sphere { pigment { color rgb <0.6,0.7,1.0> } } + +light_source { + <0, 0, 0> // light's position (translated below) + color rgb <1, 1, 1> // light's color + translate <-30, 30, -30> + shadowless +} + +#declare i = 0; +#declare Steps = 30; +#declare Kugel = sphere{<0,0,0>,0.5 pigment{color rgb<1,0,0>}}; + +#while(i rotate <0,i * 360 / Steps, 0> } + #declare i = i + 1; +#end +\end{verbatim*} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{\dots\ und was es bedeutet.} + \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg} + {Copyright Matthias Kabel, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resolution} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{Komplexeres Beispielbild, das ein Renderer produziert.} + \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg} + {Copyright Giorgio Krenkel and Alex Sandri, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resolution} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik} + \begin{itemize} + \item In der Bioinformatik untersucht man unter anderem Proteine. + \item Dazu erhält man \alert{Molekülbeschreibungen} als Eingabe. + \item Eine solche ist auch ein \alert{Wort}. + \item Eine \alert{Syntax} beschreibt die (formale) Sprache, die alle + \alert{syntaktisch korrekten Molkülbeschreibungen} enthält. + \item Eine \alert{Semantik} beschreibt, was diese Beschreibungen bedeuten. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik} + {Das »Wort«, das ein Protein beschreibt\dots} +\only{\tiny} +\only
{\footnotesize} +\begin{verbatim} +HEADER HYDROLASE 25-JUL-03 1UJ1 +TITLE CRYSTAL STRUCTURE OF SARS CORONAVIRUS MAIN PROTEINASE +TITLE 2 (3CLPRO) +COMPND MOL_ID: 1; +COMPND 2 MOLECULE: 3C-LIKE PROTEINASE; +COMPND 3 CHAIN: A, B; +COMPND 4 SYNONYM: MAIN PROTEINASE, 3CLPRO; +COMPND 5 EC: 3.4.24.-; +COMPND 6 ENGINEERED: YES +SOURCE MOL_ID: 1; +SOURCE 2 ORGANISM_SCIENTIFIC: SARS CORONAVIRUS; +SOURCE 3 ORGANISM_COMMON: VIRUSES; +SOURCE 4 STRAIN: SARS; +... +REVDAT 1 18-NOV-03 1UJ1 0 +JRNL AUTH H.YANG,M.YANG,Y.DING,Y.LIU,Z.LOU,Z.ZHOU,L.SUN,L.MO, +JRNL AUTH 2 S.YE,H.PANG,G.F.GAO,K.ANAND,M.BARTLAM,R.HILGENFELD, +JRNL AUTH 3 Z.RAO +JRNL TITL THE CRYSTAL STRUCTURES OF SEVERE ACUTE RESPIRATORY +JRNL TITL 2 SYNDROME VIRUS MAIN PROTEASE AND ITS COMPLEX WITH +JRNL TITL 3 AN INHIBITOR +JRNL REF PROC.NAT.ACAD.SCI.USA V. 100 13190 2003 +JRNL REFN ASTM PNASA6 US ISSN 0027-8424 +.... +ATOM 1 N PHE A 3 63.478 -27.806 23.971 1.00 44.82 N +ATOM 2 CA PHE A 3 64.607 -26.997 24.516 1.00 42.13 C +ATOM 3 C PHE A 3 64.674 -25.701 23.723 1.00 41.61 C +ATOM 4 O PHE A 3 65.331 -25.633 22.673 1.00 40.73 O +ATOM 5 CB PHE A 3 65.912 -27.763 24.358 1.00 44.33 C +ATOM 6 CG PHE A 3 67.065 -27.162 25.108 1.00 44.20 C +ATOM 7 CD1 PHE A 3 67.083 -27.172 26.496 1.00 43.35 C +ATOM 8 CD2 PHE A 3 68.135 -26.595 24.422 1.00 43.49 C +ATOM 9 CE1 PHE A 3 68.140 -26.631 27.187 1.00 43.21 C +ATOM 10 CE2 PHE A 3 69.210 -26.046 25.108 1.00 42.91 C +ATOM 11 CZ PHE A 3 69.216 -26.062 26.493 1.00 43.22 C +ATOM 12 N ARG A 4 64.007 -24.666 24.228 1.00 34.90 N +ATOM 13 CA ARG A 4 63.951 -23.376 23.543 1.00 37.71 C +... +\end{verbatim} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik} + {\dots\ und das Protein, das beschrieben wird.} + + \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg} + {Copyright Till Tantau, Low Resultion} +\end{frame} + + +\section
{Zusammenfassung} +\section*{Zusammenfassung} + +\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung} + \begin{enumerate} + \item Ein \alert{Wort} ist eine Folge von Symbolen aus einem + \alert{Alphabet}. + \item Eine \alert{Syntax} besteht aus Regeln, nach denen + Worte (Texte) gebaut werden dürfen. + \item Eine \alert{Semantik} legt fest, was Worte \alert{bedeuten}. + \item Eine \alert{formale Sprache} ist eine Menge von Worten + über einem Alphabet. + \end{enumerate} +\end{frame} + +\end{document} + + + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d870b1203d2 Binary files /dev/null and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7fbce74d3e3 Binary files /dev/null and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..958a7f288b5 Binary files /dev/null and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..67c4bce95c1 Binary files /dev/null and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fd6c9c1b22e Binary files /dev/null and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0a18dc5a735 Binary files /dev/null and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fb451d9195b Binary files /dev/null and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ee5a65c8d28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified +% +% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or +% 2. under the GNU Public License. +% +% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. + +\documentclass[german,a4paper,9pt]{extarticle} +\usepackage{beamerarticle} +\input{beamerexample-lecture-style.tex} +\input{beamerexample-lecture-body.tex} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e24a409cfb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau +% +% This file may be distributed and/or modified +% +% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or +% 2. under the GNU Public License. +% +% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. + + +% Common packages + +\usepackage[german]{babel} +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\usepackage{times} +\mode
+{ + \usepackage{times} + \usepackage{mathptmx} + \usepackage[left=1.5cm,right=6cm,top=1.5cm,bottom=3cm]{geometry} +} + +\usepackage{hyperref} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage{tikz} +\usepackage{colortbl} +\usepackage{yfonts} +\usepackage{colortbl} +\usepackage{translator} % comment this, if not available + + +% Common settings for all lectures in this course + +\def\lecturename{Logik für Informatiker} + +\title{\insertlecture} + +\author{Till Tantau} + +\institute +{ + Institut für Theoretische Informatik\\ + Universität zu Lübeck +} + +\subject{Vorlesung \lecturename} + + + + +% Beamer version theme settings + +\useoutertheme[height=0pt,width=2cm,right]{sidebar} +\usecolortheme{rose,sidebartab} +\useinnertheme{circles} +\usefonttheme[only large]{structurebold} + +\setbeamercolor{sidebar right}{bg=black!15} +\setbeamercolor{structure}{fg=blue} +\setbeamercolor{author}{parent=structure} + +\setbeamerfont{title}{series=\normalfont,size=\LARGE} +\setbeamerfont{title in sidebar}{series=\bfseries} +\setbeamerfont{author in sidebar}{series=\bfseries} +\setbeamerfont*{item}{series=} +\setbeamerfont{frametitle}{size=} +\setbeamerfont{block title}{size=\small} +\setbeamerfont{subtitle}{size=\normalsize,series=\normalfont} + +\setbeamertemplate{navigation symbols}{} +\setbeamertemplate{bibliography item}[book] +\setbeamertemplate{sidebar right} +{ + {\usebeamerfont{title in sidebar}% + \vskip1.5em% + \hskip3pt% + \usebeamercolor[fg]{title in sidebar}% + \insertshorttitle[width=\dimexpr2cm-6pt\relax,center,respectlinebreaks]\par% + \vskip1.25em% + }% + {% + \hskip1pt% + \usebeamercolor[fg]{author in sidebar}% + \usebeamerfont{author in sidebar}% + \insertshortauthor[width=\dimexpr2cm-2pt\relax,center,respectlinebreaks]\par% + \vskip1.25em% + }% + \hbox to2cm{\hss\insertlogo\hss} + \vskip1.25em% + \insertverticalnavigation{2cm}% + \vfill + \hbox to 2cm{\hfill\usebeamerfont{subsection in + sidebar}\strut\usebeamercolor[fg]{subsection in + sidebar}\insertshortlecture.\insertframenumber\hskip5pt}% + \vskip3pt% +}% + +\setbeamertemplate{title page} +{ + \vbox{} + \vskip1em + {\huge Kapitel \insertshortlecture\par} + {\usebeamercolor[fg]{title}\usebeamerfont{title}\inserttitle\par}% + \ifx\insertsubtitle\@empty% + \else% + \vskip0.25em% + {\usebeamerfont{subtitle}\usebeamercolor[fg]{subtitle}\insertsubtitle\par}% + \fi% + \vskip1em\par + Vorlesung \emph{\lecturename}\ vom \insertdate\par + \vskip0pt plus1filll + \leftskip=0pt plus1fill\insertauthor\par + \insertinstitute\vskip1em +} + +\logo{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf}} + + + +% Article version layout settings + +\mode
+ +\makeatletter +\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini + \parsep 0pt + \topsep 5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@ + \itemsep0pt} +\let\@listi=\@listI + + +\setbeamertemplate{frametitle}{\paragraph*{\insertframetitle\ + \ \small\insertframesubtitle}\ \par +} +\setbeamertemplate{frame end}{% + \marginpar{\scriptsize\hbox to 1cm{\sffamily% + \hfill\strut\insertshortlecture.\insertframenumber}\hrule height .2pt}} +\setlength{\marginparwidth}{1cm} +\setlength{\marginparsep}{4.5cm} + +\def\@maketitle{\makechapter} + +\def\makechapter{ + \newpage + \null + \vskip 2em% + {% + \parindent=0pt + \raggedright + \sffamily + \vskip8pt + {\fontsize{36pt}{36pt}\selectfont Kapitel \insertshortlecture \par\vskip2pt} + {\fontsize{24pt}{28pt}\selectfont \color{blue!50!black} \insertlecture\par\vskip4pt} + {\Large\selectfont \color{blue!50!black} \insertsubtitle\par} + \vskip10pt + + \normalsize\selectfont Druckfassung der + Vorlesung \emph{\lecturename} vom \@date\par\vskip1.5em + \hfill Till Tantau, Institut für Theoretische Informatik, Universität zu Lübeck + } + \par + \vskip 1.5em% +} + +\let\origstartsection=\@startsection +\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \origstartsection{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6\normalfont\sffamily\color{blue!50!black}\selectfont}} + +\makeatother + +\mode + + + + + +% Typesetting Listings + +\usepackage{listings} +\lstset{language=Java} + +\alt +{\lstset{% + basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily, + commentstyle=\slshape\color{green!50!black}, + keywordstyle=\bfseries\color{blue!50!black}, + identifierstyle=\color{blue}, + stringstyle=\color{orange}, + escapechar=\#, + emphstyle=\color{red}} +} +{ + \lstset{% + basicstyle=\ttfamily, + keywordstyle=\bfseries, + commentstyle=\itshape, + escapechar=\#, + emphstyle=\bfseries\color{red} + } +} + + + +% Common theorem-like environments + +\theoremstyle{definition} +\newtheorem{exercise}[theorem]{\translate{Exercise}} + + + + +% New useful definitions: + +\newbox\mytempbox +\newdimen\mytempdimen + +\newcommand\includegraphicscopyright[3][]{% + \leavevmode\vbox{\vskip3pt\raggedright\setbox\mytempbox=\hbox{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}% + \mytempdimen=\wd\mytempbox\box\mytempbox\par\vskip1pt% + \fontsize{3}{3.5}\selectfont{\color{black!25}{\vbox{\hsize=\mytempdimen#3}}}\vskip3pt% +}} + +\newenvironment{colortabular}[1]{\medskip\rowcolors[]{1}{blue!20}{blue!10}\tabular{#1}\rowcolor{blue!40}}{\endtabular\medskip} + +\def\equad{\leavevmode\hbox{}\quad} + +\newenvironment{greencolortabular}[1] +{\medskip\rowcolors[]{1}{green!50!black!20}{green!50!black!10}% + \tabular{#1}\rowcolor{green!50!black!40}}% +{\endtabular\medskip} + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt deleted file mode 100644 index bf128beb0f9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,451 +0,0 @@ - - GNU Free Documentation License - Version 1.3, 3 November 2008 - - - Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. - - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies - of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - -0. PREAMBLE - -The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other -functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to -assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, -with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. -Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way -to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible -for modifications made by others. - -This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative -works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It -complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft -license designed for free software. - -We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free -software, because free software needs free documentation: a free -program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the -software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; -it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or -whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License -principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. - - -1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS - -This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that -contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be -distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a -world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that -work under the conditions stated herein. The "Document", below, -refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a -licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept the license if you -copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission -under copyright law. - -A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the -Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with -modifications and/or translated into another language. - -A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of -the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the -publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall -subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall -directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in -part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain -any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical -connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, -commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding -them. - -The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles -are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice -that says that the Document is released under this License. If a -section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not -allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero -Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant -Sections then there are none. - -The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed, -as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that -the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may -be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words. - -A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, -represented in a format whose specification is available to the -general public, that is suitable for revising the document -straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of -pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available -drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or -for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input -to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file -format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart -or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. -An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount -of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque". - -Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain -ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML -or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple -HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of -transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats -include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by -proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or -processing tools are not generally available, and the -machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word -processors for output purposes only. - -The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself, -plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material -this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in -formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means -the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, -preceding the beginning of the body of the text. - -The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies of -the Document to the public. - -A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document whose -title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following -text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a -specific section name mentioned below, such as "Acknowledgements", -"Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".) To "Preserve the Title" -of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a -section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition. - -The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which -states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty -Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this -License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other -implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has -no effect on the meaning of this License. - -2. VERBATIM COPYING - -You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either -commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the -copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies -to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no -other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use -technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further -copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept -compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough -number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. - -You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and -you may publicly display copies. - - -3. COPYING IN QUANTITY - -If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have -printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the -Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the -copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover -Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on -the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify -you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present -the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and -visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. -Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve -the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated -as verbatim copying in other respects. - -If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit -legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit -reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent -pages. - -If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering -more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent -copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy -a computer-network location from which the general network-using -public has access to download using public-standard network protocols -a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. -If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, -when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure -that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated -location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an -Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that -edition to the public. - -It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the -Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to -give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the -Document. - - -4. MODIFICATIONS - -You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under -the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release -the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified -Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution -and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy -of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: - -A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct - from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions - (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section - of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version - if the original publisher of that version gives permission. -B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities - responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified - Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the - Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), - unless they release you from this requirement. -C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the - Modified Version, as the publisher. -D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. -E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications - adjacent to the other copyright notices. -F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice - giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the - terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. -G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections - and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. -H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. -I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add - to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and - publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If - there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one - stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as - given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified - Version as stated in the previous sentence. -J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for - public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise - the network locations given in the Document for previous versions - it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section. - You may omit a network location for a work that was published at - least four years before the Document itself, or if the original - publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. -K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", - Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all - the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements - and/or dedications given therein. -L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, - unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers - or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. -M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section - may not be included in the Modified Version. -N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements" - or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. -O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. - -If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or -appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material -copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all -of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the -list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. -These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. - -You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains -nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various -parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has -been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a -standard. - -You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a -passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list -of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of -Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or -through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already -includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or -by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, -you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit -permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. - -The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License -give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or -imply endorsement of any Modified Version. - - -5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS - -You may combine the Document with other documents released under this -License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified -versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the -Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and -list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its -license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. - -The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and -multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single -copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but -different contents, make the title of each such section unique by -adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original -author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. -Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of -Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. - -In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History" -in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled -"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements", -and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections -Entitled "Endorsements". - - -6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS - -You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other -documents released under this License, and replace the individual -copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy -that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules -of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all -other respects. - -You may extract a single document from such a collection, and -distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a -copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this -License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that -document. - - -7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS - -A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate -and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or -distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright -resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights -of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. -When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not -apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves -derivative works of the Document. - -If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these -copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of -the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on -covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the -electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. -Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole -aggregate. - - -8. TRANSLATION - -Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may -distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. -Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special -permission from their copyright holders, but you may include -translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the -original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a -translation of this License, and all the license notices in the -Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include -the original English version of this License and the original versions -of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between -the translation and the original version of this License or a notice -or disclaimer, the original version will prevail. - -If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements", -"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve -its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual -title. - - -9. TERMINATION - -You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document -except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt -otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and -will automatically terminate your rights under this License. - -However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license -from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, -unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally -terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder -fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to -60 days after the cessation. - -Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is -reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the -violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have -received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that -copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after -your receipt of the notice. - -Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the -licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under -this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently -reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does -not give you any rights to use it. - - -10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE - -The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the -GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions -will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in -detail to address new problems or concerns. See -https://www.gnu.org/licenses/. - -Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. -If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this -License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of -following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or -of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the -Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version -number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not -as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document -specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this -License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a -version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the -Document. - -11. RELICENSING - -"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any -World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also -provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A -public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A -"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the site -means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site. - -"CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 -license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit -corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, -California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license -published by that same organization. - -"Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in -part, as part of another Document. - -An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this -License, and if all works that were first published under this License -somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or -in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and -(2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008. - -The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site -under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, -provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing. - - -ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents - -To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of -the License in the document and put the following copyright and -license notices just after the title page: - - Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME. - Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document - under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 - or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; - with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. - A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU - Free Documentation License". - -If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, -replace the "with...Texts." line with this: - - with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the - Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. - -If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other -combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the -situation. - -If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we -recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of -free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, -to permit their use in free software. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex deleted file mode 100644 index ea2729cd8cc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,226 +0,0 @@ -% $Header$ - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% Diese Datei enthält eine Lösungsvorlage für: - - -% - Vorträge über ein beliebiges Thema. -% - Vortragslänge zwischen 15 und 45 Minuten. -% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschnörkelt/dekorativ. - - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under -% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified -% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a -% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another -% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and -% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright -% notice. - - - -\mode -{ - \usetheme{Warsaw} - % oder ... - - \setbeamercovered{transparent} - % oder auch nicht -} - - -\usepackage[german]{babel} -% oder was auch immer - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% oder was auch immer - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen -% müssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile -% mit fontenc zu löschen. - - -\title[Kurzversion des Titels] % (optional, nur bei langen Titeln nötig) -{Titel} - -\subtitle -{Untertitel} % (optional) - -\author[Autor, Anders] % (optional, nur bei vielen Autoren) -{F.~Autor\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}} -% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren -% unterschiedlichen Instituten angehören. - -\institute[Universitäten Hier und Dort] % (optional, aber oft nötig) -{ - \inst{1}% - Institut für Informatik\\ - Universität Hier - \and - \inst{2}% - Institut für theoretische Philosophie\\ - Universität Dort} -% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren -% unterschiedlichen Instituten angehören. -% - Keep it simple, niemand interessiert sich für die genau Adresse. - -\date[Kurzversion des Anlass] % (optional) -{Datum / Anlass} - - -\subject{Informatik} -% Dies wird lediglich in den PDF Informationskatalog einfügt. Kann gut -% weggelassen werden. - - -% Falls eine Logodatei namens "university-logo-filename.xxx" vorhanden -% ist, wobei xxx ein von latex bzw. pdflatex lesbares Graphikformat -% ist, so kann man wie folgt ein Logo einfügen: - -% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename} -% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}} - - - -% Folgendes sollte gelöscht werden, wenn man nicht am Anfang jedes -% Unterabschnitts die Gliederung nochmal sehen möchte. -\AtBeginSubsection[] -{ - \begin{frame}{Gliederung} - \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] - \end{frame} -} - - -% Falls Aufzählungen immer schrittweise gezeigt werden sollen, kann -% folgendes Kommando benutzt werden: - -%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} - - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame} - \titlepage -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Gliederung} - \tableofcontents - % Die Option [pausesections] könnte nützlich sein. -\end{frame} - - - -% Da dies ein Vorlage für beliebige Vorträge ist, lassen sich kaum -% allgemeine Regeln zur Strukturierung angeben. Da die Vorlage für -% einen Vortrag zwischen 15 und 45 Minuten gedacht ist, fährt man aber -% mit folgenden Regeln oft gut. - -% - Es sollte genau zwei oder drei Abschnitte geben (neben der -% Zusammenfassung). -% - *Höchstens* drei Unterabschnitte pro Abschnitt. -% - Pro Rahmen sollte man zwischen 30s und 2min reden. Es sollte also -% 15 bis 30 Rahmen geben. - - - -\section{Einleitung} - -\subsection[Kurzversion des ersten Unterabschnittstitels] -{Erster Unterabschnittstitel} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.\\ - Korrekte Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachten.}{Untertitel sind optional.} - % - Eine Überschrift fasst einen Rahmen verständlich zusammen. Man - % muss sie verstehen können, selbst wenn man nicht den Rest des - % Rahmens versteht. - - \begin{itemize} - \item - Viel \texttt{itemize} benutzen. - \item - Sehr kurze Sätze oder Satzglieder verwenden. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} - - Man kann Overlays erzeugen\dots - \begin{itemize} - \item mit dem \texttt{pause}-Befehl: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Erster Punkt. - \pause - \item - Zweiter Punkt. - \end{itemize} - \item - mittels Overlay-Spezifikationen: - \begin{itemize} - \item<3-> - Erster Punkt. - \item<4-> - Zweiter Punkt. - \end{itemize} - \item - mit dem allgemeinen \texttt{uncover}-Befehl: - \begin{itemize} - \uncover<5->{\item - Erster Punkt.} - \uncover<6->{\item - Zweiter Punkt.} - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Zweiter Unterabschnittstitel} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} -\end{frame} - -\section*{Zusammenfassung} - -\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung} - - % Die Zusammenfassung sollte sehr kurz sein. - \begin{itemize} - \item - Die \alert{erste Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen. - \item - Die \alert{zweite Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen. - \item - Eventuell noch eine \alert{dritte Botschaft}, aber nicht noch mehr. - \end{itemize} - - % Der folgende Ausblick ist optional. - \vskip0pt plus.5fill - \begin{itemize} - \item - Ausblick - \begin{itemize} - \item - Etwas, was wir noch nicht lösen konnten. - \item - Nochwas, das wir noch nicht lösen konnten. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a07a6f15df0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,216 +0,0 @@ -% $Header$ - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% This file is a solution template for: - -% - Giving a talk on some subject. -% - The talk is between 15min and 45min long. -% - Style is ornate. - - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under -% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified -% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a -% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another -% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and -% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright -% notice. - - -\mode -{ - \usetheme{Warsaw} - % or ... - - \setbeamercovered{transparent} - % or whatever (possibly just delete it) -} - - -\usepackage[english]{babel} -% or whatever - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% or whatever - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1 -% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc. - - -\title[Short Paper Title] % (optional, use only with long paper titles) -{Presentation Title} - -\subtitle -{Presentation Subtitle} % (optional) - -\author[Author, Another] % (optional, use only with lots of authors) -{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Another\inst{2}} -% - Use the \inst{?} command only if the authors have different -% affiliation. - -\institute[Universities of Somewhere and Elsewhere] % (optional, but mostly needed) -{ - \inst{1}% - Department of Computer Science\\ - University of Somewhere - \and - \inst{2}% - Department of Theoretical Philosophy\\ - University of Elsewhere} -% - Use the \inst command only if there are several affiliations. -% - Keep it simple, no one is interested in your street address. - -\date[Short Occasion] % (optional) -{Date / Occasion} - -\subject{Talks} -% This is only inserted into the PDF information catalog. Can be left -% out. - - - -% If you have a file called "university-logo-filename.xxx", where xxx -% is a graphic format that can be processed by latex or pdflatex, -% resp., then you can add a logo as follows: - -% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename} -% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}} - - - -% Delete this, if you do not want the table of contents to pop up at -% the beginning of each subsection: -\AtBeginSubsection[] -{ - \begin{frame}{Outline} - \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] - \end{frame} -} - - -% If you wish to uncover everything in a step-wise fashion, uncomment -% the following command: - -%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame} - \titlepage -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Outline} - \tableofcontents - % You might wish to add the option [pausesections] -\end{frame} - - -% Since this a solution template for a generic talk, very little can -% be said about how it should be structured. However, the talk length -% of between 15min and 45min and the theme suggest that you stick to -% the following rules: - -% - Exactly two or three sections (other than the summary). -% - At *most* three subsections per section. -% - Talk about 30s to 2min per frame. So there should be between about -% 15 and 30 frames, all told. - -\section{Introduction} - -\subsection[Short First Subsection Name]{First Subsection Name} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative. Use Uppercase Letters.}{Subtitles are optional.} - % - A title should summarize the slide in an understandable fashion - % for anyone how does not follow everything on the slide itself. - - \begin{itemize} - \item - Use \texttt{itemize} a lot. - \item - Use very short sentences or short phrases. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} - - You can create overlays\dots - \begin{itemize} - \item using the \texttt{pause} command: - \begin{itemize} - \item - First item. - \pause - \item - Second item. - \end{itemize} - \item - using overlay specifications: - \begin{itemize} - \item<3-> - First item. - \item<4-> - Second item. - \end{itemize} - \item - using the general \texttt{uncover} command: - \begin{itemize} - \uncover<5->{\item - First item.} - \uncover<6->{\item - Second item.} - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Second Subsection} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} -\end{frame} - - - -\section*{Summary} - -\begin{frame}{Summary} - - % Keep the summary *very short*. - \begin{itemize} - \item - The \alert{first main message} of your talk in one or two lines. - \item - The \alert{second main message} of your talk in one or two lines. - \item - Perhaps a \alert{third message}, but not more than that. - \end{itemize} - - % The following outlook is optional. - \vskip0pt plus.5fill - \begin{itemize} - \item - Outlook - \begin{itemize} - \item - Something you haven't solved. - \item - Something else you haven't solved. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex deleted file mode 100644 index e75f14788db..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,221 +0,0 @@ -% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% Ce fichier est un exemple-type pour : - -% - donner un exposé sur un certain sujet -% - une durée variant de 15 à 45 minutes -% - un style ornemental. - - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa -% -% En principe, ce fichier peut être redistribué et/ou modifié conformément -% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% Cependant, ce fichier est supposé comme étant un "exemple-type" qui -% peut être modifié selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si -% vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu' "exemple-type" et non -% spécifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un package ou -% programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier -% librement et de modifier ce fichier et même d'effacer ce message de -% copyright. - - - -\mode { - \usetheme{Warsaw} - % ou autre ... - - \setbeamercovered{transparent} - % ou autre chose (il est également possible de supprimer cette ligne) -} - - -\usepackage[french]{babel} -% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel} - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% or autre - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent être assortis. Si T1 -% ne paraît pas très esthétique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc. - - -\title[Titre court] % (facultatif, à utiliser uniquement si le titre de l'article est trop long) -{Très long titre qui prend de la place} - -\subtitle {Sous-titre de la présentation} - -\author[Auteur, Lautre] % (facultatif, à utiliser seulement avec plusieurs auteurs) -{F.~Auteur\inst{1} \and S.~Lautre\inst{2}} -% - Composez les noms dans l'ordre dans lequel ils apparaîtrons dans l'article -% - Utilisez la commande \inst{?} uniquement si les auteurs ont des affiliations -% différentes. - -\institute[Universités de Quelque Part et d'Ailleurs] % (facultatif mais généralement nécessaire) -{ - \inst{1}% - Département d'Informatique\\ - Université de Quelque Part - \and - \inst{2}% - Département de Philosophie Théorique\\ - Université d'Ailleurs} -% - Utilisez la commande \inst uniquement s'il y a plusieurs affectations -% - Faîtes quelque chose de simple, personne ne s'intéresse à votre adresse. - -\date[Version courte] % (facultatif) -{Date / Occasion} - -\subject{Exposé} -% Inséré uniquement dans la page d'information du fichier PDF. Peut être -% supprimé. - - - -% Si vous avez un fichier nommé "université-logo-nomfichier.xxx", où xxx -% est un format graphique accepté par latex ou pdflatex (comme par exemple .png), -% alors vous pouvez insérer votre logo ainsi : - -% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{le-logo}{université-logo-nomfichier} -% \logo{\pgfuseimage{le-logo}} - - - -% À supprimer si vous ne voulez pas que la table des matières apparaisse -% au début de chaque sous-section : - -\AtBeginSubsection[] { - \begin{frame}{Lignes directrices} - \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] - \end{frame} -} - - -% Si vous souhaitez recouvrir vos transparents un à un, -% utilisez la commande suivante (pour plus d'info, voir la page 74 du manuel -% d'utilisation de Beamer (version 3.06) par Till Tantau) : - -%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame} - \titlepage -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Lignes directrices} - \tableofcontents - % Vous pouvez, si vous le souhaiter ajouter l'option [pausesections] -\end{frame} - - -% Puisqu'il s'agit d'un exemple-type pour un exposé d'ordre général, peu de choses -% peuvent être dites concernant sa structure. Cependant, la durée varie de 15 minutes -% à 45 minutes et le thème vous suggère de suivre les règles suivantes : - -% - Avoir exactement deux ou trois sections (autre que la table des matières). -% - Tout au plus trois sous-sections par section -% - Parlez approximativement entre 30 secondes et 2 minutes par transparent. Il -% devrait donc y avoir entre 15 et 30 transparents, tous ayant été commentés. - -\section{Introduction} - -\subsection[Court titre s-section]{Un très long titre de sous-section.} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.}{Les sous-titres sont facultatifs.} - % - Le titre doit résumer le transparent dans un langage compréhensible - % par tous ceux qui ne suivront rien de ce qu'il y a sur ce transparent. - - \begin{itemize} - \item Utilisez \texttt{itemize} à volonté. - \item Utilisez des phrases très courtes et de courtes expressions. - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent} - - Vous pouvez créer des recouvrements\dots - \begin{itemize} - \item en utilisant la commande \texttt{pause} : - \begin{itemize} - \item - Premier item. - \pause - \item - Second item. - \end{itemize} - \item - en utilisant les spécifications des recouvrements - \begin{itemize} - \item<3-> - Premier item. - \item<4-> - Second item. - \end{itemize} - \item - en utilisant en général la commande \texttt{uncover} : - \begin{itemize} - \uncover<5->{\item - Premier item.} - \uncover<6->{\item - Second item.} - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\subsection{Deuxième sous-section} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment super ! -\end{frame} - -\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} - - {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment génial ! -\end{frame} - - - -\section*{Résumé} - -\begin{frame}{Résumé} - - % Faîtes un résumé *très court*. - \begin{itemize} - \item - Le \alert{premier message principal} de l'exposé en une ligne ou - deux. - \item - Le \alert{deuxième message principal} de l'exposé en une ligne ou - deux. - \item - Peut-être un \alert{troisième message}, mais pas plus que ça. - \end{itemize} - - % Les perspectives suivantes sont facultatives. - \vskip0pt plus.5fill - \begin{itemize} - \item - Perspectives - \begin{itemize} - \item - Problème non résolu. - \item - Autre problème non résolu. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d159169d105..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,339 +0,0 @@ - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - Version 2, June 1991 - - Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies - of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - - Preamble - - The licenses for most software are designed to take away your -freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public -License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free -software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This -General Public License applies to most of the Free Software -Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to -using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by -the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to -your programs, too. - - When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not -price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you -have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for -this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it -if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it -in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. - - To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid -anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. -These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you -distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. - - For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether -gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that -you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the -source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their -rights. - - We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and -(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, -distribute and/or modify the software. - - Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain -that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free -software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we -want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so -that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original -authors' reputations. - - Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software -patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free -program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the -program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any -patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. - - The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and -modification follow. - - GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE - TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION - - 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains -a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed -under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, -refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" -means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: -that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, -either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another -language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in -the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". - -Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not -covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of -running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program -is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the -Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). -Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - - 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's -source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you -conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate -copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the -notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; -and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License -along with the Program. - -You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and -you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. - - 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion -of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and -distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 -above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: - - a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices - stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. - - b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in - whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any - part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third - parties under the terms of this License. - - c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively - when run, you must cause it, when started running for such - interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an - announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a - notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide - a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under - these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this - License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but - does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on - the Program is not required to print an announcement.) - -These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If -identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, -and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in -themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those -sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you -distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based -on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of -this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the -entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. - -Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest -your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to -exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or -collective works based on the Program. - -In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program -with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of -a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under -the scope of this License. - - 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, -under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of -Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: - - a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable - source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections - 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, - - b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three - years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your - cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete - machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be - distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium - customarily used for software interchange; or, - - c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer - to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is - allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you - received the program in object code or executable form with such - an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) - -The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for -making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source -code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any -associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to -control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a -special exception, the source code distributed need not include -anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary -form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the -operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component -itself accompanies the executable. - -If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering -access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent -access to copy the source code from the same place counts as -distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not -compelled to copy the source along with the object code. - - 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program -except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt -otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is -void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. -However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under -this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such -parties remain in full compliance. - - 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not -signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or -distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are -prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by -modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the -Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and -all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying -the Program or works based on it. - - 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the -Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the -original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to -these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further -restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. -You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to -this License. - - 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent -infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), -conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or -otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not -excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot -distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this -License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you -may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent -license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by -all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then -the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to -refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. - -If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under -any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to -apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other -circumstances. - -It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any -patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any -such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the -integrity of the free software distribution system, which is -implemented by public license practices. Many people have made -generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed -through that system in reliance on consistent application of that -system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing -to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot -impose that choice. - -This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to -be a consequence of the rest of this License. - - 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in -certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the -original copyright holder who places the Program under this License -may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding -those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among -countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates -the limitation as if written in the body of this License. - - 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions -of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will -be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to -address new problems or concerns. - -Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program -specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any -later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions -either of that version or of any later version published by the Free -Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of -this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software -Foundation. - - 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free -programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author -to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free -Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes -make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals -of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and -of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. - - NO WARRANTY - - 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY -FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN -OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES -PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED -OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF -MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS -TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE -PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, -REPAIR OR CORRECTION. - - 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING -WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR -REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, -INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING -OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED -TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY -YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER -PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE -POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. - - END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS - - How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs - - If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest -possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it -free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. - - To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest -to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively -convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least -the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. - - - Copyright (C) - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify - it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by - the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or - (at your option) any later version. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along - with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. - -Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. - -If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this -when it starts in an interactive mode: - - Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author - Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. - This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it - under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. - -The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate -parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may -be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be -mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. - -You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your -school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if -necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: - - Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program - `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. - - , 1 April 1989 - Ty Coon, President of Vice - -This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into -proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may -consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the -library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General -Public License instead of this License. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bf128beb0f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,451 @@ + + GNU Free Documentation License + Version 1.3, 3 November 2008 + + + Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + +0. PREAMBLE + +The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other +functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to +assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, +with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. +Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way +to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible +for modifications made by others. + +This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative +works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It +complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft +license designed for free software. + +We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free +software, because free software needs free documentation: a free +program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the +software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; +it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or +whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License +principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. + + +1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS + +This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that +contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be +distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a +world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that +work under the conditions stated herein. The "Document", below, +refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a +licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept the license if you +copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission +under copyright law. + +A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the +Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with +modifications and/or translated into another language. + +A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of +the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the +publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall +subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall +directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in +part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain +any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical +connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, +commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding +them. + +The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles +are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice +that says that the Document is released under this License. If a +section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not +allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero +Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant +Sections then there are none. + +The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed, +as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that +the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may +be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words. + +A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, +represented in a format whose specification is available to the +general public, that is suitable for revising the document +straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of +pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available +drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or +for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input +to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file +format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart +or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. +An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount +of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque". + +Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain +ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML +or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple +HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of +transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats +include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by +proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or +processing tools are not generally available, and the +machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word +processors for output purposes only. + +The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself, +plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material +this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in +formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means +the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, +preceding the beginning of the body of the text. + +The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies of +the Document to the public. + +A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document whose +title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following +text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a +specific section name mentioned below, such as "Acknowledgements", +"Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".) To "Preserve the Title" +of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a +section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition. + +The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which +states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty +Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this +License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other +implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has +no effect on the meaning of this License. + +2. VERBATIM COPYING + +You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either +commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the +copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies +to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no +other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use +technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further +copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept +compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough +number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. + +You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and +you may publicly display copies. + + +3. COPYING IN QUANTITY + +If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have +printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the +Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the +copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover +Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on +the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify +you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present +the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and +visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. +Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve +the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated +as verbatim copying in other respects. + +If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit +legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit +reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent +pages. + +If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering +more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent +copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy +a computer-network location from which the general network-using +public has access to download using public-standard network protocols +a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. +If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, +when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure +that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated +location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an +Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that +edition to the public. + +It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the +Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to +give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the +Document. + + +4. MODIFICATIONS + +You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under +the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release +the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified +Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution +and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy +of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: + +A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct + from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions + (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section + of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version + if the original publisher of that version gives permission. +B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities + responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified + Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the + Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), + unless they release you from this requirement. +C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the + Modified Version, as the publisher. +D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. +E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications + adjacent to the other copyright notices. +F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice + giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the + terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. +G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections + and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. +H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. +I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add + to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and + publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If + there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one + stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as + given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified + Version as stated in the previous sentence. +J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for + public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise + the network locations given in the Document for previous versions + it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section. + You may omit a network location for a work that was published at + least four years before the Document itself, or if the original + publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. +K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", + Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all + the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements + and/or dedications given therein. +L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, + unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers + or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. +M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section + may not be included in the Modified Version. +N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements" + or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. +O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. + +If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or +appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material +copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all +of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the +list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. +These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. + +You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains +nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various +parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has +been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a +standard. + +You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a +passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list +of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of +Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or +through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already +includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or +by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, +you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit +permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. + +The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License +give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or +imply endorsement of any Modified Version. + + +5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS + +You may combine the Document with other documents released under this +License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified +versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the +Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and +list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its +license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers. + +The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and +multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single +copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but +different contents, make the title of each such section unique by +adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original +author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. +Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of +Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. + +In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History" +in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled +"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements", +and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections +Entitled "Endorsements". + + +6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS + +You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other +documents released under this License, and replace the individual +copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy +that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules +of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all +other respects. + +You may extract a single document from such a collection, and +distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a +copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this +License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that +document. + + +7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS + +A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate +and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or +distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright +resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights +of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. +When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not +apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves +derivative works of the Document. + +If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these +copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of +the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on +covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the +electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. +Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole +aggregate. + + +8. TRANSLATION + +Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may +distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. +Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special +permission from their copyright holders, but you may include +translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the +original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a +translation of this License, and all the license notices in the +Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include +the original English version of this License and the original versions +of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between +the translation and the original version of this License or a notice +or disclaimer, the original version will prevail. + +If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements", +"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve +its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual +title. + + +9. TERMINATION + +You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and +will automatically terminate your rights under this License. + +However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license +from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, +unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally +terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder +fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to +60 days after the cessation. + +Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is +reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the +violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have +received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that +copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after +your receipt of the notice. + +Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the +licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under +this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently +reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does +not give you any rights to use it. + + +10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE + +The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the +GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions +will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in +detail to address new problems or concerns. See +https://www.gnu.org/licenses/. + +Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. +If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this +License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of +following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or +of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the +Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version +number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not +as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document +specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this +License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a +version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the +Document. + +11. RELICENSING + +"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any +World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also +provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A +public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A +"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the site +means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site. + +"CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 +license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit +corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, +California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license +published by that same organization. + +"Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in +part, as part of another Document. + +An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this +License, and if all works that were first published under this License +somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or +in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and +(2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008. + +The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site +under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, +provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing. + + +ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents + +To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of +the License in the document and put the following copyright and +license notices just after the title page: + + Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME. + Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document + under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 + or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; + with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. + A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU + Free Documentation License". + +If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, +replace the "with...Texts." line with this: + + with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the + Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. + +If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other +combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the +situation. + +If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we +recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of +free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, +to permit their use in free software. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d159169d105 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,339 @@ + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + + Copyright (C) + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along + with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this +when it starts in an interactive mode: + + Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author + Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may +be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be +mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + + Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program + `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. + + , 1 April 1989 + Ty Coon, President of Vice + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into +proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may +consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the +library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General +Public License instead of this License. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..22443139013 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,416 @@ +The LaTeX Project Public License +=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- + +LPPL Version 1.3c 2008-05-04 + +Copyright 1999 2002-2008 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + + +PREAMBLE +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the primary license under +which the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed. + +You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright +and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly +suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but +it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is +unrelated to TeX. + +The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE', +below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations for authors +who are considering distributing their works under this license. + +This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed +and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of +that work may be distributed. + +We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you +the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work +that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while +maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of +that work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' +and `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + + +DEFINITIONS +=========== + +In this license document the following terms are used: + + `Work' + Any work being distributed under this License. + + `Derived Work' + Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work. + + `Modification' + Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable + law -- for example, the production of a file containing an + original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of + such a file, either verbatim or with modifications and/or + translated into another language. + + `Modify' + To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any + applicable law. + + `Distribution' + Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in + whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to) + making any electronic components of the Work accessible by + file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file + systems such as Sun's Network File System (NFS). + + `Compiled Work' + A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it + is directly usable on a computer system. This processing may + include using installation facilities provided by the Work, + transformations of the Work, copying of components of the Work, or + other activities. Note that modification of any installation + facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work. + + `Current Maintainer' + A person or persons nominated as such within the Work. If there is + no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under + any applicable law. + + `Base Interpreter' + A program or process that is normally needed for running or + interpreting a part or the whole of the Work. + + A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these + are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each + external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used + interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the + license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a + `LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the + `LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `TeX language'. + + + +CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +=========================================== + +1. Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the Work +are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In +particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and no +requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work. + +2. You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as you +received it. Distribution of only part of the Work is considered +modification of the Work, and no right to distribute such a Derived +Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause. + +3. You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a +complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2 +above, as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that +the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly +as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work +directly from the Work. + +4. If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may, without +restriction, modify the Work, thus creating a Derived Work. You may +also distribute the Derived Work without restriction, including +Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work. Derived Works +distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to +be updated versions of the Work. + +5. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may modify +your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work, +and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a Compiled Work based on +the Derived Work. + +6. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may +distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met +for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states +in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only +the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption +to a component of the Work. + + a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement + for a component of the Work when that component is used with the + Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of the Work + identifies itself to the user when used interactively with that + Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this Derived Work + clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version + of this component to the user when used interactively with that + Base Interpreter. + + b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices + detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a + prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part + of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log + of the changes. + + c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons, + including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version + of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to) + the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients of the + Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that + they do provide such support for the Derived Work. + + d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work: + + 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; + if your distribution of a modified component is made by + offering access to copy the modified component from a + designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy + the Work from the same or some similar place meets this + condition, even though third parties are not compelled to + copy the Work along with the modified component; + + 2. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete, + unmodified copy of the Work. + +7. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may +distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long as +the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled +Work, and as long as the conditions of Clause 6, above, are met with +regard to the Derived Work. + +8. The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not +apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component so that it +becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as +it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4, above. + +9. Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative +format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is +then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or +nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of +applying that process. + +10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license + provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in + Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have + to honor the rest of the conditions in this license. + + b. If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license, that + Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of + itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the + restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work. + +11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to +the Work, nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating +such works with the Work by any means. + +12. Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, prevent +complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws. + + +NO WARRANTY +=========== + +There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in +writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without +warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not +limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a +particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance +of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove defective, you assume +the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. + +In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing +will The Copyright Holder, or any author named in the components of the +Work, or any other party who may distribute and/or modify the Work as +permitted above, be liable to you for damages, including any general, +special, incidental or consequential damages arising out of any use of +the Work or out of inability to use the Work (including, but not limited +to, loss of data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by +anyone as a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other +programs), even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other +party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. + + +MAINTENANCE OF THE WORK +======================= + +The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder +explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in +the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder +or simply that it is `author-maintained'. + +The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current Maintainer +who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error +reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a valid e-mail +address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge +or act upon these error reports. + +The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there +is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current +Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means +of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other +significant signs of active maintenance. + +You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with +any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role. + +If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer of +the Work through the following steps: + + 1. Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and + the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of + an Internet or similar search. + + 2. If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work + is still maintained. + + a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer + to update their communication data within one month. + + b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active + maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce + within the pertinent community your intention to take over + maintenance. (If the Work is a LaTeX work, this could be + done, for example, by posting to comp.text.tex.) + + 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass + maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect + immediately upon announcement. + + b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright + Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you, + then this takes effect immediately upon announcement. + + 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above + and after three months your intention is challenged neither by + the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other + people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as + to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer. + + 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes + reachable once more within three months of a change completed + under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must + become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided + they then update their communication data within one month. + +A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the fact +that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license. + +If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should +immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous +statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also +announce your new status to the same pertinent community as +in 2b) above. + + +WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE +====================================================== + +This section contains important instructions, examples, and +recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their +works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in +this section. + +Choosing This License or Another License +---------------------------------------- + +If for any part of your work you want or need to use *distribution* +conditions that differ significantly from those in this license, then +do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but, instead, +distribute your work under a different license. You may use the text +of this license as a model for your own license, but your license +should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that +your work is distributed under the LPPL. + +The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains +the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, +for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public +License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your work is +unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be +relevant, and authors intending to distribute their works under any +license are encouraged to read it. + +A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution +----------------------------------------------------- + +It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your own +personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for +distributing the modified component. While you might intend that such +modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen by +accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; or +it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified +version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions +of this license in ways that could have legal implications and, worse, +cause problems for the community. It is therefore usually in your +best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public +one. Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work +without altering any of its licensed components. + +How to Use This License +----------------------- + +To use this license, place in each of the components of your work both +an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work +was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include also a +statement that the distribution and/or modification of that +component is constrained by the conditions in this license. + +Here is an example of such a notice and statement: + + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2005 M. Y. Name + % + % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 2005/12/01 or later. + % + % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. + % + % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name. + % + % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + % and the derived file pig.sty. + +Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions +given in this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring +to the three files `pig.dtx', `pig.ins', and `pig.sty' (the last being +generated from `pig.dtx' using `pig.ins'), the `Base Interpreter' +referring to any `LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright Holder' and +`Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. + +If you do not want the Maintenance section of LPPL to apply to your +Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'. +However, we recommend that you use `maintained', as the Maintenance +section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful to +the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it +yourself. + +Derived Works That Are Not Replacements +--------------------------------------- + +Several clauses of the LPPL specify means to provide reliability and +stability for the user community. They therefore concern themselves +with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used as a +(compatible or incompatible) replacement of the original Work. If +this is not the case (e.g., if a few lines of code are reused for a +completely different task), then clauses 6b and 6d shall not apply. + + +Important Recommendations +------------------------- + + Defining What Constitutes the Work + + The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the + files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a + way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work. + This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the + files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by + using a line such as: + + % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. + + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be + entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise + the Work. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8a7da88a35e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +base: +art/ +beamer.cls +beamerarticle.sty +beamerbasearticle.sty +beamerbaseauxtemplates.sty +beamerbaseboxes.sty +beamerbasecolor.sty +beamerbasecompatibility.sty +beamerbasedecode.sty +beamerbaseexercise.sty +beamerbasefont.sty +beamerbaseframe.sty +beamerbaseframecomponents.sty +beamerbaseframesize.sty +beamerbaselocalstructure.sty +beamerbasemisc.sty +beamerbasemodes.sty +beamerbasenavigation.sty +beamerbasenotes.sty +beamerbaseoptions.sty +beamerbaseoverlay.sty +beamerbaserequires.sty +beamerbasesection.sty +beamerbasetemplates.sty +beamerbasethemes.sty +beamerbasetheorems.sty +beamerbasetitle.sty +beamerbasetoc.sty +beamerbasetranslator.sty +beamerbasetwoscreens.sty +beamerbaseverbatim.sty +emulation/ +multimedia/ +patch/ +themes/ + +base/art: +beamericonarticle.20.eps +beamericonarticle.20.pdf +beamericonarticle.eps +beamericonarticle.pdf +beamericonarticle.tex +beamericonbook.20.eps +beamericonbook.20.pdf +beamericonbook.eps +beamericonbook.pdf +beamericonbook.tex +beamericononline.20.eps +beamericononline.20.pdf +beamericononline.eps +beamericononline.pdf + +base/emulation: +beamerfoils.sty +beamerprosper.sty +beamerseminar.sty +beamertexpower.sty + +base/multimedia: +multimedia.sty +multimediasymbols.sty +xmpmulti.sty + +base/patch: +beamerpatchparalist.sty + +base/themes: +color/ +font/ +inner/ +outer/ +theme/ + +base/themes/color: +beamercolorthemealbatross.sty +beamercolorthemebeaver.sty +beamercolorthemebeetle.sty +beamercolorthemecrane.sty +beamercolorthemedefault.sty +beamercolorthemedolphin.sty +beamercolorthemedove.sty +beamercolorthemefly.sty +beamercolorthemelily.sty +beamercolorthememonarca.sty +beamercolorthemeorchid.sty +beamercolorthemerose.sty +beamercolorthemeseagull.sty +beamercolorthemeseahorse.sty +beamercolorthemesidebartab.sty +beamercolorthemespruce.sty +beamercolorthemestructure.sty +beamercolorthemewhale.sty +beamercolorthemewolverine.sty + +base/themes/font: +beamerfontthemedefault.sty +beamerfontthemeprofessionalfonts.sty +beamerfontthemeserif.sty +beamerfontthemestructurebold.sty +beamerfontthemestructureitalicserif.sty +beamerfontthemestructuresmallcapsserif.sty + +base/themes/inner: +beamerinnerthemecircles.sty +beamerinnerthemedefault.sty +beamerinnerthemeinmargin.sty +beamerinnerthemerectangles.sty +beamerinnerthemerounded.sty + +base/themes/outer: +beamerouterthemedefault.sty +beamerouterthemeinfolines.sty +beamerouterthememiniframes.sty +beamerouterthemeshadow.sty +beamerouterthemesidebar.sty +beamerouterthemesmoothbars.sty +beamerouterthemesmoothtree.sty +beamerouterthemesplit.sty +beamerouterthemetree.sty + +base/themes/theme: +beamerthemeAnnArbor.sty +beamerthemeAntibes.sty +beamerthemeBergen.sty +beamerthemeBerkeley.sty +beamerthemeBerlin.sty +beamerthemeBoadilla.sty +beamerthemeboxes.sty +beamerthemeCambridgeUS.sty +beamerthemeCopenhagen.sty +beamerthemeDarmstadt.sty +beamerthemedefault.sty +beamerthemeDresden.sty +beamerthemeEastLansing.sty +beamerthemeFrankfurt.sty +beamerthemeGoettingen.sty +beamerthemeHannover.sty +beamerthemeIlmenau.sty +beamerthemeJuanLesPins.sty +beamerthemeLuebeck.sty +beamerthemeMadrid.sty +beamerthemeMalmoe.sty +beamerthemeMarburg.sty +beamerthemeMontpellier.sty +beamerthemePaloAlto.sty +beamerthemePittsburgh.sty +beamerthemeRochester.sty +beamerthemeSingapore.sty +beamerthemeSzeged.sty +beamerthemeWarsaw.sty +compatibility/ + +base/themes/theme/compatibility: +beamerthemebars.sty +beamerthemeclassic.sty +beamerthemecompatibility.sty +beamerthemelined.sty +beamerthemeplain.sty +beamerthemeshadow.sty +beamerthemesidebar.sty +beamerthemesplit.sty +beamerthemetree.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7f97e516f24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +doc: +beamercolorthemeexample.tex +beamerfontthemeexample.tex +beamerinnerthemeexample.tex +beamerlogo.pdf +beamerouterthemeexample.tex +beamerthemeexample.tex +beamerthemeexamplebase.tex +beamerug-animations.tex +beamerug-color.tex +beamerug-compatibility.tex +beamerug-elements.tex +beamerug-emulation.tex +beamerug-fonts.tex +beamerug-frames.tex +beamerug-globalstructure.tex +beamerug-graphics.tex +beamerug-guidelines.tex +beamerug-installation.tex +beamerug-interaction.tex +beamerug-introduction.tex +beamerug-license.tex +beamerug-localstructure.tex +beamerug-macros.tex +beamerug-nonpresentation.tex +beamerug-notes.tex +beamerug-overlays.tex +beamerug-solutions.tex +beamerug-themes.tex +beamerug-transparencies.tex +beamerug-tricks.tex +beamerug-tutorial.tex +beamerug-twoscreens.tex +beamerug-workflow.tex +beameruserguide.tex +emulation-examples/ +examples/ +licenses/ +solutions/ + +doc/emulation-examples: +beamerexample-foils.tex +beamerexample-prosper.tex +beamerexample-seminar.tex +beamerexample-texpower.tex + +doc/examples: +a-conference-talk/ +a-lecture/ + +doc/examples/a-conference-talk/: +beamerexample-conference-talk.tex + +doc/examples/a-lecture/: +beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex +beamerexample-lecture-body.tex +beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf +beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg +beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg +beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg +beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg +beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg +beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg +beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex +beamerexample-lecture-style.tex + +doc/licenses: +fdl.txt +gpl-2.0.txt +lppl-1-3c.txt +manifest-code.txt +manifest-documentation.txt + +doc/solutions: +conference-talks/ +generic-talks/ +short-talks/ + +doc/solutions/conference-talks: +conference-ornate-20min.de.tex +conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex +conference-ornate-20min.en.tex + +doc/solutions/generic-talks: +generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex +generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex +generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex + +doc/solutions/short-talks: +speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex +speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex +speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 22443139013..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,416 +0,0 @@ -The LaTeX Project Public License -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- - -LPPL Version 1.3c 2008-05-04 - -Copyright 1999 2002-2008 LaTeX3 Project - Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this - license document, but modification of it is not allowed. - - -PREAMBLE -======== - -The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the primary license under -which the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed. - -You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright -and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly -suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but -it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is -unrelated to TeX. - -The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE', -below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations for authors -who are considering distributing their works under this license. - -This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed -and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of -that work may be distributed. - -We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you -the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work -that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while -maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of -that work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while -meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' -and `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. - - -DEFINITIONS -=========== - -In this license document the following terms are used: - - `Work' - Any work being distributed under this License. - - `Derived Work' - Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work. - - `Modification' - Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable - law -- for example, the production of a file containing an - original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of - such a file, either verbatim or with modifications and/or - translated into another language. - - `Modify' - To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any - applicable law. - - `Distribution' - Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in - whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to) - making any electronic components of the Work accessible by - file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file - systems such as Sun's Network File System (NFS). - - `Compiled Work' - A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it - is directly usable on a computer system. This processing may - include using installation facilities provided by the Work, - transformations of the Work, copying of components of the Work, or - other activities. Note that modification of any installation - facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work. - - `Current Maintainer' - A person or persons nominated as such within the Work. If there is - no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under - any applicable law. - - `Base Interpreter' - A program or process that is normally needed for running or - interpreting a part or the whole of the Work. - - A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these - are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each - external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used - interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the - license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a - `LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the - `LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `TeX language'. - - - -CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION -=========================================== - -1. Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the Work -are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In -particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and no -requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work. - -2. You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as you -received it. Distribution of only part of the Work is considered -modification of the Work, and no right to distribute such a Derived -Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause. - -3. You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a -complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2 -above, as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that -the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly -as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work -directly from the Work. - -4. If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may, without -restriction, modify the Work, thus creating a Derived Work. You may -also distribute the Derived Work without restriction, including -Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work. Derived Works -distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to -be updated versions of the Work. - -5. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may modify -your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work, -and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a Compiled Work based on -the Derived Work. - -6. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may -distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met -for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states -in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only -the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption -to a component of the Work. - - a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement - for a component of the Work when that component is used with the - Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of the Work - identifies itself to the user when used interactively with that - Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this Derived Work - clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version - of this component to the user when used interactively with that - Base Interpreter. - - b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices - detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a - prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part - of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log - of the changes. - - c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons, - including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version - of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to) - the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients of the - Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that - they do provide such support for the Derived Work. - - d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work: - - 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; - if your distribution of a modified component is made by - offering access to copy the modified component from a - designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy - the Work from the same or some similar place meets this - condition, even though third parties are not compelled to - copy the Work along with the modified component; - - 2. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete, - unmodified copy of the Work. - -7. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may -distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long as -the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled -Work, and as long as the conditions of Clause 6, above, are met with -regard to the Derived Work. - -8. The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not -apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component so that it -becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as -it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4, above. - -9. Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative -format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is -then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or -nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of -applying that process. - -10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license - provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in - Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have - to honor the rest of the conditions in this license. - - b. If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license, that - Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of - itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the - restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work. - -11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to -the Work, nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating -such works with the Work by any means. - -12. Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, prevent -complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws. - - -NO WARRANTY -=========== - -There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in -writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without -warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not -limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a -particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance -of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove defective, you assume -the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. - -In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing -will The Copyright Holder, or any author named in the components of the -Work, or any other party who may distribute and/or modify the Work as -permitted above, be liable to you for damages, including any general, -special, incidental or consequential damages arising out of any use of -the Work or out of inability to use the Work (including, but not limited -to, loss of data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by -anyone as a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other -programs), even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other -party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. - - -MAINTENANCE OF THE WORK -======================= - -The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder -explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in -the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder -or simply that it is `author-maintained'. - -The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current Maintainer -who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error -reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a valid e-mail -address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge -or act upon these error reports. - -The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there -is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current -Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means -of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other -significant signs of active maintenance. - -You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with -any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role. - -If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer of -the Work through the following steps: - - 1. Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and - the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of - an Internet or similar search. - - 2. If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work - is still maintained. - - a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer - to update their communication data within one month. - - b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active - maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce - within the pertinent community your intention to take over - maintenance. (If the Work is a LaTeX work, this could be - done, for example, by posting to comp.text.tex.) - - 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass - maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect - immediately upon announcement. - - b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright - Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you, - then this takes effect immediately upon announcement. - - 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above - and after three months your intention is challenged neither by - the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other - people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as - to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer. - - 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes - reachable once more within three months of a change completed - under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must - become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided - they then update their communication data within one month. - -A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the fact -that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license. - -If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should -immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous -statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also -announce your new status to the same pertinent community as -in 2b) above. - - -WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE -====================================================== - -This section contains important instructions, examples, and -recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their -works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in -this section. - -Choosing This License or Another License ----------------------------------------- - -If for any part of your work you want or need to use *distribution* -conditions that differ significantly from those in this license, then -do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but, instead, -distribute your work under a different license. You may use the text -of this license as a model for your own license, but your license -should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that -your work is distributed under the LPPL. - -The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains -the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, -for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public -License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your work is -unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be -relevant, and authors intending to distribute their works under any -license are encouraged to read it. - -A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution ------------------------------------------------------ - -It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your own -personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for -distributing the modified component. While you might intend that such -modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen by -accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; or -it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified -version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions -of this license in ways that could have legal implications and, worse, -cause problems for the community. It is therefore usually in your -best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public -one. Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work -without altering any of its licensed components. - -How to Use This License ------------------------ - -To use this license, place in each of the components of your work both -an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work -was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include also a -statement that the distribution and/or modification of that -component is constrained by the conditions in this license. - -Here is an example of such a notice and statement: - - %% pig.dtx - %% Copyright 2005 M. Y. Name - % - % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the - % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 - % of this license or (at your option) any later version. - % The latest version of this license is in - % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt - % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX - % version 2005/12/01 or later. - % - % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. - % - % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name. - % - % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins - % and the derived file pig.sty. - -Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions -given in this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring -to the three files `pig.dtx', `pig.ins', and `pig.sty' (the last being -generated from `pig.dtx' using `pig.ins'), the `Base Interpreter' -referring to any `LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright Holder' and -`Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. - -If you do not want the Maintenance section of LPPL to apply to your -Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'. -However, we recommend that you use `maintained', as the Maintenance -section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful to -the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it -yourself. - -Derived Works That Are Not Replacements ---------------------------------------- - -Several clauses of the LPPL specify means to provide reliability and -stability for the user community. They therefore concern themselves -with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used as a -(compatible or incompatible) replacement of the original Work. If -this is not the case (e.g., if a few lines of code are reused for a -completely different task), then clauses 6b and 6d shall not apply. - - -Important Recommendations -------------------------- - - Defining What Constitutes the Work - - The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the - files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a - way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work. - This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the - files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by - using a line such as: - - % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. - - in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be - impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you - to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be - entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise - the Work. - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 8a7da88a35e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,163 +0,0 @@ -base: -art/ -beamer.cls -beamerarticle.sty -beamerbasearticle.sty -beamerbaseauxtemplates.sty -beamerbaseboxes.sty -beamerbasecolor.sty -beamerbasecompatibility.sty -beamerbasedecode.sty -beamerbaseexercise.sty -beamerbasefont.sty -beamerbaseframe.sty -beamerbaseframecomponents.sty -beamerbaseframesize.sty -beamerbaselocalstructure.sty -beamerbasemisc.sty -beamerbasemodes.sty -beamerbasenavigation.sty -beamerbasenotes.sty -beamerbaseoptions.sty -beamerbaseoverlay.sty -beamerbaserequires.sty -beamerbasesection.sty -beamerbasetemplates.sty -beamerbasethemes.sty -beamerbasetheorems.sty -beamerbasetitle.sty -beamerbasetoc.sty -beamerbasetranslator.sty -beamerbasetwoscreens.sty -beamerbaseverbatim.sty -emulation/ -multimedia/ -patch/ -themes/ - -base/art: -beamericonarticle.20.eps -beamericonarticle.20.pdf -beamericonarticle.eps -beamericonarticle.pdf -beamericonarticle.tex -beamericonbook.20.eps -beamericonbook.20.pdf -beamericonbook.eps -beamericonbook.pdf -beamericonbook.tex -beamericononline.20.eps -beamericononline.20.pdf -beamericononline.eps -beamericononline.pdf - -base/emulation: -beamerfoils.sty -beamerprosper.sty -beamerseminar.sty -beamertexpower.sty - -base/multimedia: -multimedia.sty -multimediasymbols.sty -xmpmulti.sty - -base/patch: -beamerpatchparalist.sty - -base/themes: -color/ -font/ -inner/ -outer/ -theme/ - -base/themes/color: -beamercolorthemealbatross.sty -beamercolorthemebeaver.sty -beamercolorthemebeetle.sty -beamercolorthemecrane.sty -beamercolorthemedefault.sty -beamercolorthemedolphin.sty -beamercolorthemedove.sty -beamercolorthemefly.sty -beamercolorthemelily.sty -beamercolorthememonarca.sty -beamercolorthemeorchid.sty -beamercolorthemerose.sty -beamercolorthemeseagull.sty -beamercolorthemeseahorse.sty -beamercolorthemesidebartab.sty -beamercolorthemespruce.sty -beamercolorthemestructure.sty -beamercolorthemewhale.sty -beamercolorthemewolverine.sty - -base/themes/font: -beamerfontthemedefault.sty -beamerfontthemeprofessionalfonts.sty -beamerfontthemeserif.sty -beamerfontthemestructurebold.sty -beamerfontthemestructureitalicserif.sty -beamerfontthemestructuresmallcapsserif.sty - -base/themes/inner: -beamerinnerthemecircles.sty -beamerinnerthemedefault.sty -beamerinnerthemeinmargin.sty -beamerinnerthemerectangles.sty -beamerinnerthemerounded.sty - -base/themes/outer: -beamerouterthemedefault.sty -beamerouterthemeinfolines.sty -beamerouterthememiniframes.sty -beamerouterthemeshadow.sty -beamerouterthemesidebar.sty -beamerouterthemesmoothbars.sty -beamerouterthemesmoothtree.sty -beamerouterthemesplit.sty -beamerouterthemetree.sty - -base/themes/theme: -beamerthemeAnnArbor.sty -beamerthemeAntibes.sty -beamerthemeBergen.sty -beamerthemeBerkeley.sty -beamerthemeBerlin.sty -beamerthemeBoadilla.sty -beamerthemeboxes.sty -beamerthemeCambridgeUS.sty -beamerthemeCopenhagen.sty -beamerthemeDarmstadt.sty -beamerthemedefault.sty -beamerthemeDresden.sty -beamerthemeEastLansing.sty -beamerthemeFrankfurt.sty -beamerthemeGoettingen.sty -beamerthemeHannover.sty -beamerthemeIlmenau.sty -beamerthemeJuanLesPins.sty -beamerthemeLuebeck.sty -beamerthemeMadrid.sty -beamerthemeMalmoe.sty -beamerthemeMarburg.sty -beamerthemeMontpellier.sty -beamerthemePaloAlto.sty -beamerthemePittsburgh.sty -beamerthemeRochester.sty -beamerthemeSingapore.sty -beamerthemeSzeged.sty -beamerthemeWarsaw.sty -compatibility/ - -base/themes/theme/compatibility: -beamerthemebars.sty -beamerthemeclassic.sty -beamerthemecompatibility.sty -beamerthemelined.sty -beamerthemeplain.sty -beamerthemeshadow.sty -beamerthemesidebar.sty -beamerthemesplit.sty -beamerthemetree.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7f97e516f24..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ -doc: -beamercolorthemeexample.tex -beamerfontthemeexample.tex -beamerinnerthemeexample.tex -beamerlogo.pdf -beamerouterthemeexample.tex -beamerthemeexample.tex -beamerthemeexamplebase.tex -beamerug-animations.tex -beamerug-color.tex -beamerug-compatibility.tex -beamerug-elements.tex -beamerug-emulation.tex -beamerug-fonts.tex -beamerug-frames.tex -beamerug-globalstructure.tex -beamerug-graphics.tex -beamerug-guidelines.tex -beamerug-installation.tex -beamerug-interaction.tex -beamerug-introduction.tex -beamerug-license.tex -beamerug-localstructure.tex -beamerug-macros.tex -beamerug-nonpresentation.tex -beamerug-notes.tex -beamerug-overlays.tex -beamerug-solutions.tex -beamerug-themes.tex -beamerug-transparencies.tex -beamerug-tricks.tex -beamerug-tutorial.tex -beamerug-twoscreens.tex -beamerug-workflow.tex -beameruserguide.tex -emulation-examples/ -examples/ -licenses/ -solutions/ - -doc/emulation-examples: -beamerexample-foils.tex -beamerexample-prosper.tex -beamerexample-seminar.tex -beamerexample-texpower.tex - -doc/examples: -a-conference-talk/ -a-lecture/ - -doc/examples/a-conference-talk/: -beamerexample-conference-talk.tex - -doc/examples/a-lecture/: -beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex -beamerexample-lecture-body.tex -beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf -beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg -beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg -beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg -beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg -beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg -beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg -beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex -beamerexample-lecture-style.tex - -doc/licenses: -fdl.txt -gpl-2.0.txt -lppl-1-3c.txt -manifest-code.txt -manifest-documentation.txt - -doc/solutions: -conference-talks/ -generic-talks/ -short-talks/ - -doc/solutions/conference-talks: -conference-ornate-20min.de.tex -conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex -conference-ornate-20min.en.tex - -doc/solutions/generic-talks: -generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex -generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex -generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex - -doc/solutions/short-talks: -speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex -speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex -speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7f602b73475 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex @@ -0,0 +1,293 @@ +% $Header$ + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% Diese Datei enthält eine Lösungsvorlage für: + +% - Vorträge bei einer (deutschsprachigen) Konferenz/einem Kolloquium. +% - Vortragslänge von etwa 20 Minuten. +% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschnörkelt/dekorativ. + + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under +% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified +% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a +% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another +% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and +% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright +% notice. + + + +\mode +{ + \usetheme{Warsaw} + % oder ... + + \setbeamercovered{transparent} + % oder auch nicht +} + + +\usepackage[german]{babel} +% oder was auch immer + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% oder was auch immer + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen +% müssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile +% mit fontenc zu löschen. + + +\title[Kurzversion des Titels] % (optional, nur bei langen Titeln nötig) +{Titel wie im Tagunsband angegeben\\ (u.U.\ also englisch)} + +\subtitle +{Untertitel nur angeben, wenn es einen im Tagungsband gibt} + +\author[Autor, Anders] % (optional, nur bei vielen Autoren) +{F.~Autor\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}} +% - Namen müssen in derselben Reihenfolge wie im Papier erscheinen. +% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren +% unterschiedlichen Instituten angehören. + +\institute[Universitäten Hier und Dort] % (optional, aber oft nötig) +{ + \inst{1}% + Institut für Informatik\\ + Universität Hier + \and + \inst{2}% + Institut für theoretische Philosophie\\ + Universität Dort} +% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren +% unterschiedlichen Instituten angehören. +% - Keep it simple, niemand interessiert sich für die genau Adresse. + +\date[KPT 2003] % (optional, sollte der abgekürzte Konferenzname sein) +{Konferenz über Präsentationstechniken, 2004} +% - Vollee oder abgekürzter Name sind möglich. +% - Dieser Eintrag ist nicht für das Publikum gedacht (das weiß +% nämlich, bei welcher Konferenz es ist), sondern für Leute, die die +% Folien später lesen. + +\subject{Informatik} +% Dies wird lediglich in den PDF Informationskatalog einfügt. Kann gut +% weggelassen werden. + + +% Falls eine Logodatei namens "university-logo-filename.xxx" vorhanden +% ist, wobei xxx ein von latex bzw. pdflatex lesbares Graphikformat +% ist, so kann man wie folgt ein Logo einfügen: + +% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename} +% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}} + + + +% Folgendes sollte gelöscht werden, wenn man nicht am Anfang jedes +% Unterabschnitts die Gliederung nochmal sehen möchte. +\AtBeginSubsection[] +{ + \begin{frame}{Gliederung} + \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] + \end{frame} +} + + +% Falls Aufzählungen immer schrittweise gezeigt werden sollen, kann +% folgendes Kommando benutzt werden: + +%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} + + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame} + \titlepage +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Gliederung} + \tableofcontents + % Die Option [pausesections] könnte nützlich sein. +\end{frame} + + + +% Einen Vortrag zu strukturieren ist nicht immer einfach. Die +% nachfolgende Struktur kann unangemessen sein. Hier ein paar Regeln, +% die für diese Lösungsvorlage gelten: + +% - Es sollte genau zwei oder drei Abschnitte geben (neben der +% Zusammenfassung). +% - *Höchstens* drei Unterabschnitte pro Abschnitt. +% - Pro Rahmen sollte man zwischen 30s und 2min reden. Es sollte also +% 15 bis 30 Rahmen geben. + +% - Konferenzteilnehmer wissen oft wenig von der Materie des +% Vortrags. Deshalb: vereinfachen! +% - In 20 Minuten ist es schon schwer genug, die Hauptbotschaft zu +% vermitteln. Deshalb sollten Details ausgelassen werden, selbst +% wenn dies zu Ungenauigkeiten oder Halbwahrheiten führt. +% - Falls man Details weglässt, die eigentlich wichtig für einen +% Beweis/Implementation sind, so sagt man dies einmal nüchtern. Alle +% werden damit glücklich sein. + +\section{Motivation} + +\subsection{Das behandelte Problem} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.\\ + Korrekte Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachten.}{Untertitel sind optional.} + % - Eine Überschrift fasst einen Rahmen verständlich zusammen. Man + % muss sie verstehen können, selbst wenn man nicht den Rest des + % Rahmens versteht. + + \begin{itemize} + \item + Viel \texttt{itemize} benutzen. + \item + Sehr kurze Sätze oder Satzglieder verwenden. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} + + Man kann Overlays erzeugen\dots + \begin{itemize} + \item mit dem \texttt{pause}-Befehl: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Erster Punkt. + \pause + \item + Zweiter Punkt. + \end{itemize} + \item + mittels Overlay-Spezifikationen: + \begin{itemize} + \item<3-> + Erster Punkt. + \item<4-> + Zweiter Punkt. + \end{itemize} + \item + mit dem allgemeinen \texttt{uncover}-Befehl: + \begin{itemize} + \uncover<5->{\item + Erster Punkt.} + \uncover<6->{\item + Zweiter Punkt.} + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Frühere Arbeiten} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + + +\section{Unsere Resultate/Beitrag} + +\subsection{Hauptresultate} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + + + +\subsection{Beweis-/Implementationsideen} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + + + +\section*{Zusammenfassung} + +\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung} + + % Die Zusammenfassung sollte sehr kurz sein. + \begin{itemize} + \item + Die \alert{erste Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen. + \item + Die \alert{zweite Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen. + \item + Eventuell noch eine \alert{dritte Botschaft}, aber nicht noch mehr. + \end{itemize} + + % Der folgende Ausblick ist optional. + \vskip0pt plus.5fill + \begin{itemize} + \item + Ausblick + \begin{itemize} + \item + Etwas, was wir noch nicht lösen konnten. + \item + Nochwas, das wir noch nicht lösen konnten. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + + +% Alles nachfolgende ist optional und typischerweise nicht nötig. +\appendix +\section*{\appendixname} +\subsection*{Weiterführende Literatur} + +\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks] + \frametitle{Weiterführende Literatur} + + \begin{thebibliography}{10} + + \beamertemplatebookbibitems + % Anfangen sollte man mit Übersichtswerken. + + \bibitem{Autor1990} + A.~Autor. + \newblock {\em Einführung in das Präsentationswesen}. + \newblock Klein-Verlag, 1990. + + + \beamertemplatearticlebibitems + % Vertiefende Literatur kommt später. Die Liste sollte kurz sein. + + \bibitem{Jemand2000} + S.~Jemand. + \newblock On this and that. + \newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100, 2000. + \end{thebibliography} +\end{frame} + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6b9195dc674 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ +% $Header$ + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% This file is a solution template for: + +% - Talk at a conference/colloquium. +% - Talk length is about 20min. +% - Style is ornate. + + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under +% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified +% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a +% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another +% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and +% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright +% notice. + + +\mode +{ + \usetheme{Warsaw} + % or ... + + \setbeamercovered{transparent} + % or whatever (possibly just delete it) +} + + +\usepackage[english]{babel} +% or whatever + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% or whatever + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1 +% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc. + + +\title[Short Paper Title] % (optional, use only with long paper titles) +{Title As It Is In the Proceedings} + +\subtitle +{Include Only If Paper Has a Subtitle} + +\author[Author, Another] % (optional, use only with lots of authors) +{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Another\inst{2}} +% - Give the names in the same order as the appear in the paper. +% - Use the \inst{?} command only if the authors have different +% affiliation. + +\institute[Universities of Somewhere and Elsewhere] % (optional, but mostly needed) +{ + \inst{1}% + Department of Computer Science\\ + University of Somewhere + \and + \inst{2}% + Department of Theoretical Philosophy\\ + University of Elsewhere} +% - Use the \inst command only if there are several affiliations. +% - Keep it simple, no one is interested in your street address. + +\date[CFP 2003] % (optional, should be abbreviation of conference name) +{Conference on Fabulous Presentations, 2003} +% - Either use conference name or its abbreviation. +% - Not really informative to the audience, more for people (including +% yourself) who are reading the slides online + +\subject{Theoretical Computer Science} +% This is only inserted into the PDF information catalog. Can be left +% out. + + + +% If you have a file called "university-logo-filename.xxx", where xxx +% is a graphic format that can be processed by latex or pdflatex, +% resp., then you can add a logo as follows: + +% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename} +% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}} + + + +% Delete this, if you do not want the table of contents to pop up at +% the beginning of each subsection: +\AtBeginSubsection[] +{ + \begin{frame}{Outline} + \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] + \end{frame} +} + + +% If you wish to uncover everything in a step-wise fashion, uncomment +% the following command: + +%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame} + \titlepage +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Outline} + \tableofcontents + % You might wish to add the option [pausesections] +\end{frame} + + +% Structuring a talk is a difficult task and the following structure +% may not be suitable. Here are some rules that apply for this +% solution: + +% - Exactly two or three sections (other than the summary). +% - At *most* three subsections per section. +% - Talk about 30s to 2min per frame. So there should be between about +% 15 and 30 frames, all told. + +% - A conference audience is likely to know very little of what you +% are going to talk about. So *simplify*! +% - In a 20min talk, getting the main ideas across is hard +% enough. Leave out details, even if it means being less precise than +% you think necessary. +% - If you omit details that are vital to the proof/implementation, +% just say so once. Everybody will be happy with that. + +\section{Motivation} + +\subsection{The Basic Problem That We Studied} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative. Use Uppercase Letters.}{Subtitles are optional.} + % - A title should summarize the slide in an understandable fashion + % for anyone how does not follow everything on the slide itself. + + \begin{itemize} + \item + Use \texttt{itemize} a lot. + \item + Use very short sentences or short phrases. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} + + You can create overlays\dots + \begin{itemize} + \item using the \texttt{pause} command: + \begin{itemize} + \item + First item. + \pause + \item + Second item. + \end{itemize} + \item + using overlay specifications: + \begin{itemize} + \item<3-> + First item. + \item<4-> + Second item. + \end{itemize} + \item + using the general \texttt{uncover} command: + \begin{itemize} + \uncover<5->{\item + First item.} + \uncover<6->{\item + Second item.} + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Previous Work} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + + + +\section{Our Results/Contribution} + +\subsection{Main Results} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Basic Ideas for Proofs/Implementation} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + + + +\section*{Summary} + +\begin{frame}{Summary} + + % Keep the summary *very short*. + \begin{itemize} + \item + The \alert{first main message} of your talk in one or two lines. + \item + The \alert{second main message} of your talk in one or two lines. + \item + Perhaps a \alert{third message}, but not more than that. + \end{itemize} + + % The following outlook is optional. + \vskip0pt plus.5fill + \begin{itemize} + \item + Outlook + \begin{itemize} + \item + Something you haven't solved. + \item + Something else you haven't solved. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + + +% All of the following is optional and typically not needed. +\appendix +\section*{\appendixname} +\subsection*{For Further Reading} + +\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks] + \frametitle{For Further Reading} + + \begin{thebibliography}{10} + + \beamertemplatebookbibitems + % Start with overview books. + + \bibitem{Author1990} + A.~Author. + \newblock {\em Handbook of Everything}. + \newblock Some Press, 1990. + + + \beamertemplatearticlebibitems + % Followed by interesting articles. Keep the list short. + + \bibitem{Someone2000} + S.~Someone. + \newblock On this and that. + \newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100, + 2000. + \end{thebibliography} +\end{frame} + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cf7d86018bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex @@ -0,0 +1,297 @@ +% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% Ce fichier est un exemple d'exposé + +% - pour des conférences, +% - d'une durée approximative de 20 minutes, +% - avec un style ornemental. + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa +% +% En principe, ce fichier peut être redistribué et/ou modifié conformément +% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% Cependant, ce fichier est supposé comme étant un "exemple-type" qui peut être modifié +% selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu' +% "exemple-type" et non spécifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un +% package ou programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier librement et +% de modifier ce fichier et même d'effacer ce message de copyright. + + +\mode { + \usetheme{Warsaw} + % ou autre ... + + \setbeamercovered{transparent} + % ou autre chose (il est également possible de supprimer cette ligne) +} + + +\usepackage[french]{babel} +% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel} + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% or autre + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent être assortis. Si T1 +% ne paraît pas très esthétique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc. + + +\title[Titre court] % (facultatif, à utiliser uniquement si le titre de l'article est trop long) +{Très long titre qui prend de la place} + +\subtitle {ne compléter que si l'article possède un sous-titre} + +\author[Auteur, Lautre] % (facultatif, à utiliser seulement avec plusieurs auteurs) +{F.~Auteur\inst{1} \and S.~Lautre\inst{2}} +% - Composez les noms dans l'ordre dans lequel ils apparaîtrons dans l'article +% - Utilisez la commande \inst{?} uniquement si les auteurs ont des affiliations +% différentes. + +\institute[Universités de Quelque Part et d'Ailleurs] % (facultatif mais généralement nécessaire) +{ + \inst{1}% + Département d'Informatique\\ + Université de Quelque Part + \and + \inst{2}% + Département de Philosophie Théorique\\ + Université d'Ailleurs} +% - Utilisez la commande \inst uniquement s'il y a plusieurs affectations +% - Faîtes quelque chose de simple, personne ne s'intéresse à votre adresse + +\date[CFP 2006] % (facultatif, peut être une abréviation du nom de la conférence) +{Conférence sur les Fantastiques Présentations, 2006} +% - Utilisez à la fois le nom de la conférence et son abréviation. +% - N'a pas réellement d'importance pour l'assistance qui sera présente lors de la conférence, +% mais en a surtout pour les personnes (y compris vous-même) qui liront les transparents en ligne. + +\subject{La théorie de l'Informatique} +% Inséré uniquement dans la page d'information du fichier PDF. Peut être +% supprimé. + + + +% Si vous avez un fichier nommé "université-logo-nomfichier.xxx", où xxx +% est un format graphique accepté par latex ou pdflatex (comme par exemple .png), +% alors vous pouvez insérer votre logo ainsi : + +% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{le-logo}{université-logo-nomfichier} +% \logo{\pgfuseimage{le-logo}} + + + +% À supprimer si vous ne voulez pas que la table des matières apparaisse +% au début de chaque sous-section : + +\AtBeginSubsection[] { + \begin{frame}{Lignes directrices} + \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] + \end{frame} +} + +% Si vous souhaitez recouvrir vos transparents un à un, +% utilisez la commande suivante (pour plus d'info, voir la page 74 du manuel +% d'utilisation de Beamer (version 3.06) par Till Tantau) : + +%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame} + \titlepage +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Lignes directrices} + \tableofcontents + % Vous pouvez, si vous le souhaiter ajouter l'option [pausesections] +\end{frame} + + +% Structurer l'entretien est une tâche difficile et la structure suivante +% pourrait ne pas convenir. Voici quelques règles à appliquer pour cet +% exemple ci : + +% - Avoir exactement deux ou trois sections (autre que la table des matières). +% - Tout au plus trois sous-sections par section +% - Parlez approximativement entre 30 secondes et 2 minutes par transparent. Il +% devrait donc y avoir entre 15 et 30 transparents, tous ayant été commentés. + +% - Le public d'une conférence connaîtra probablement peu de chose sur le sujet +% que vous serez en train de traiter. Donc, *simplifiez* ! +% - Dans un exposé de 20 minutes, garder à l'esprit les idées principales est largement +% suffisant pour votre assistance. Laissez tomber certains détails, même s'ils vous +% semblent nécessaires. +% - Si vous omettez un détail qui est vital pour une preuve/mise en oeuvre, +% dites le simplement une fois. Ce sera suffisant pour tout le monde. + +\section{Motivation} + +\subsection{Le problème étudié} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.}{Les sous-titres sont facultatifs.} + % - Le titre doit résumer le transparent dans un langage compréhensible + % par tous ceux qui ne suivront rien de ce qu'il y a sur ce transparent. + + \begin{itemize} + \item Utilisez \texttt{itemize} à volonté. + \item Utilisez des phrases très courtes et de courtes expressions. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent} + + Vous pouvez créer des recouvrements\dots + \begin{itemize} + \item en utilisant la commande \texttt{pause} : + \begin{itemize} + \item + Premier item. + \pause + \item + Second item. + \end{itemize} + \item + en utilisant les spécifications des recouvrements + \begin{itemize} + \item<3-> + Premier item. + \item<4-> + Second item. + \end{itemize} + \item + en utilisant en général la commande \texttt{uncover} : + \begin{itemize} + \uncover<5->{\item + Premier item.} + \uncover<6->{\item + Second item.} + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Travail préalable} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment super ! +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment génial ! +\end{frame} + + + +\section{Nos résultats/contribution} + +\subsection{Principaux résultats} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + {\scshape Beamer} possèdent plusieurs thèmes différents... +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + Merci à Till Tantau pour {\scshape Beamer} et son manuel. +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + Toute la puissance de \LaTeX{} pour créer des présentations. +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Idées de bases pour les preuves} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + Une idée... +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + Une autre... +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + Et une dernière... +\end{frame} + + + +\section*{Résumé} + +\begin{frame}{Résumé} + + % Faîtes un résumé *très court*. + \begin{itemize} + \item + Le \alert{premier message principal} de l'exposé en une ligne ou + deux. + \item + Le \alert{deuxième message principal} de l'exposé en une ligne ou + deux. + \item + Peut-être un \alert{troisième message}, mais pas plus que ça. + \end{itemize} + + % Les perspectives suivantes sont facultatives. + \vskip0pt plus.5fill + \begin{itemize} + \item + Perspectives + \begin{itemize} + \item + Problème non résolu. + \item + Autre problème non résolu. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + + +% Tout ce qui suit est facultatif et n'est typiquement pas nécessaire. +\appendix +\section*{\appendixname} +\subsection*{Lectures complémentaires} + +\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks] + \frametitle{Lectures complémentaires} + + \begin{thebibliography}{10} + + \beamertemplatebookbibitems + % Commencer avec des livres (image d'un livre insérée) + + \bibitem{Auteur1990} + A.~Auteur. + \newblock {\em Livre de quelque chose}. + \newblock Une Edition, 1990. + + + \beamertemplatearticlebibitems + % Et continuer avec les articles (image d'un article incluse). Faîtes une liste brève. + + \bibitem{Quelqu'un2000} + S.~Quelqu'un. + \newblock Et ceci et cela. + \newblock {\em Journal de ceci et cela}, 2(1):50--100, + 2000. + \end{thebibliography} +\end{frame} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ea2729cd8cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +% $Header$ + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% Diese Datei enthält eine Lösungsvorlage für: + + +% - Vorträge über ein beliebiges Thema. +% - Vortragslänge zwischen 15 und 45 Minuten. +% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschnörkelt/dekorativ. + + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under +% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified +% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a +% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another +% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and +% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright +% notice. + + + +\mode +{ + \usetheme{Warsaw} + % oder ... + + \setbeamercovered{transparent} + % oder auch nicht +} + + +\usepackage[german]{babel} +% oder was auch immer + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% oder was auch immer + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen +% müssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile +% mit fontenc zu löschen. + + +\title[Kurzversion des Titels] % (optional, nur bei langen Titeln nötig) +{Titel} + +\subtitle +{Untertitel} % (optional) + +\author[Autor, Anders] % (optional, nur bei vielen Autoren) +{F.~Autor\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}} +% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren +% unterschiedlichen Instituten angehören. + +\institute[Universitäten Hier und Dort] % (optional, aber oft nötig) +{ + \inst{1}% + Institut für Informatik\\ + Universität Hier + \and + \inst{2}% + Institut für theoretische Philosophie\\ + Universität Dort} +% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren +% unterschiedlichen Instituten angehören. +% - Keep it simple, niemand interessiert sich für die genau Adresse. + +\date[Kurzversion des Anlass] % (optional) +{Datum / Anlass} + + +\subject{Informatik} +% Dies wird lediglich in den PDF Informationskatalog einfügt. Kann gut +% weggelassen werden. + + +% Falls eine Logodatei namens "university-logo-filename.xxx" vorhanden +% ist, wobei xxx ein von latex bzw. pdflatex lesbares Graphikformat +% ist, so kann man wie folgt ein Logo einfügen: + +% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename} +% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}} + + + +% Folgendes sollte gelöscht werden, wenn man nicht am Anfang jedes +% Unterabschnitts die Gliederung nochmal sehen möchte. +\AtBeginSubsection[] +{ + \begin{frame}{Gliederung} + \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] + \end{frame} +} + + +% Falls Aufzählungen immer schrittweise gezeigt werden sollen, kann +% folgendes Kommando benutzt werden: + +%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} + + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame} + \titlepage +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Gliederung} + \tableofcontents + % Die Option [pausesections] könnte nützlich sein. +\end{frame} + + + +% Da dies ein Vorlage für beliebige Vorträge ist, lassen sich kaum +% allgemeine Regeln zur Strukturierung angeben. Da die Vorlage für +% einen Vortrag zwischen 15 und 45 Minuten gedacht ist, fährt man aber +% mit folgenden Regeln oft gut. + +% - Es sollte genau zwei oder drei Abschnitte geben (neben der +% Zusammenfassung). +% - *Höchstens* drei Unterabschnitte pro Abschnitt. +% - Pro Rahmen sollte man zwischen 30s und 2min reden. Es sollte also +% 15 bis 30 Rahmen geben. + + + +\section{Einleitung} + +\subsection[Kurzversion des ersten Unterabschnittstitels] +{Erster Unterabschnittstitel} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.\\ + Korrekte Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachten.}{Untertitel sind optional.} + % - Eine Überschrift fasst einen Rahmen verständlich zusammen. Man + % muss sie verstehen können, selbst wenn man nicht den Rest des + % Rahmens versteht. + + \begin{itemize} + \item + Viel \texttt{itemize} benutzen. + \item + Sehr kurze Sätze oder Satzglieder verwenden. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} + + Man kann Overlays erzeugen\dots + \begin{itemize} + \item mit dem \texttt{pause}-Befehl: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Erster Punkt. + \pause + \item + Zweiter Punkt. + \end{itemize} + \item + mittels Overlay-Spezifikationen: + \begin{itemize} + \item<3-> + Erster Punkt. + \item<4-> + Zweiter Punkt. + \end{itemize} + \item + mit dem allgemeinen \texttt{uncover}-Befehl: + \begin{itemize} + \uncover<5->{\item + Erster Punkt.} + \uncover<6->{\item + Zweiter Punkt.} + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Zweiter Unterabschnittstitel} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Überschriften müssen informativ sein.} +\end{frame} + +\section*{Zusammenfassung} + +\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung} + + % Die Zusammenfassung sollte sehr kurz sein. + \begin{itemize} + \item + Die \alert{erste Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen. + \item + Die \alert{zweite Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen. + \item + Eventuell noch eine \alert{dritte Botschaft}, aber nicht noch mehr. + \end{itemize} + + % Der folgende Ausblick ist optional. + \vskip0pt plus.5fill + \begin{itemize} + \item + Ausblick + \begin{itemize} + \item + Etwas, was wir noch nicht lösen konnten. + \item + Nochwas, das wir noch nicht lösen konnten. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a07a6f15df0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex @@ -0,0 +1,216 @@ +% $Header$ + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% This file is a solution template for: + +% - Giving a talk on some subject. +% - The talk is between 15min and 45min long. +% - Style is ornate. + + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under +% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified +% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a +% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another +% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and +% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright +% notice. + + +\mode +{ + \usetheme{Warsaw} + % or ... + + \setbeamercovered{transparent} + % or whatever (possibly just delete it) +} + + +\usepackage[english]{babel} +% or whatever + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% or whatever + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1 +% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc. + + +\title[Short Paper Title] % (optional, use only with long paper titles) +{Presentation Title} + +\subtitle +{Presentation Subtitle} % (optional) + +\author[Author, Another] % (optional, use only with lots of authors) +{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Another\inst{2}} +% - Use the \inst{?} command only if the authors have different +% affiliation. + +\institute[Universities of Somewhere and Elsewhere] % (optional, but mostly needed) +{ + \inst{1}% + Department of Computer Science\\ + University of Somewhere + \and + \inst{2}% + Department of Theoretical Philosophy\\ + University of Elsewhere} +% - Use the \inst command only if there are several affiliations. +% - Keep it simple, no one is interested in your street address. + +\date[Short Occasion] % (optional) +{Date / Occasion} + +\subject{Talks} +% This is only inserted into the PDF information catalog. Can be left +% out. + + + +% If you have a file called "university-logo-filename.xxx", where xxx +% is a graphic format that can be processed by latex or pdflatex, +% resp., then you can add a logo as follows: + +% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename} +% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}} + + + +% Delete this, if you do not want the table of contents to pop up at +% the beginning of each subsection: +\AtBeginSubsection[] +{ + \begin{frame}{Outline} + \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] + \end{frame} +} + + +% If you wish to uncover everything in a step-wise fashion, uncomment +% the following command: + +%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame} + \titlepage +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Outline} + \tableofcontents + % You might wish to add the option [pausesections] +\end{frame} + + +% Since this a solution template for a generic talk, very little can +% be said about how it should be structured. However, the talk length +% of between 15min and 45min and the theme suggest that you stick to +% the following rules: + +% - Exactly two or three sections (other than the summary). +% - At *most* three subsections per section. +% - Talk about 30s to 2min per frame. So there should be between about +% 15 and 30 frames, all told. + +\section{Introduction} + +\subsection[Short First Subsection Name]{First Subsection Name} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative. Use Uppercase Letters.}{Subtitles are optional.} + % - A title should summarize the slide in an understandable fashion + % for anyone how does not follow everything on the slide itself. + + \begin{itemize} + \item + Use \texttt{itemize} a lot. + \item + Use very short sentences or short phrases. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} + + You can create overlays\dots + \begin{itemize} + \item using the \texttt{pause} command: + \begin{itemize} + \item + First item. + \pause + \item + Second item. + \end{itemize} + \item + using overlay specifications: + \begin{itemize} + \item<3-> + First item. + \item<4-> + Second item. + \end{itemize} + \item + using the general \texttt{uncover} command: + \begin{itemize} + \uncover<5->{\item + First item.} + \uncover<6->{\item + Second item.} + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Second Subsection} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.} +\end{frame} + + + +\section*{Summary} + +\begin{frame}{Summary} + + % Keep the summary *very short*. + \begin{itemize} + \item + The \alert{first main message} of your talk in one or two lines. + \item + The \alert{second main message} of your talk in one or two lines. + \item + Perhaps a \alert{third message}, but not more than that. + \end{itemize} + + % The following outlook is optional. + \vskip0pt plus.5fill + \begin{itemize} + \item + Outlook + \begin{itemize} + \item + Something you haven't solved. + \item + Something else you haven't solved. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e75f14788db --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ +% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% Ce fichier est un exemple-type pour : + +% - donner un exposé sur un certain sujet +% - une durée variant de 15 à 45 minutes +% - un style ornemental. + + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa +% +% En principe, ce fichier peut être redistribué et/ou modifié conformément +% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% Cependant, ce fichier est supposé comme étant un "exemple-type" qui +% peut être modifié selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si +% vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu' "exemple-type" et non +% spécifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un package ou +% programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier +% librement et de modifier ce fichier et même d'effacer ce message de +% copyright. + + + +\mode { + \usetheme{Warsaw} + % ou autre ... + + \setbeamercovered{transparent} + % ou autre chose (il est également possible de supprimer cette ligne) +} + + +\usepackage[french]{babel} +% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel} + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% or autre + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent être assortis. Si T1 +% ne paraît pas très esthétique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc. + + +\title[Titre court] % (facultatif, à utiliser uniquement si le titre de l'article est trop long) +{Très long titre qui prend de la place} + +\subtitle {Sous-titre de la présentation} + +\author[Auteur, Lautre] % (facultatif, à utiliser seulement avec plusieurs auteurs) +{F.~Auteur\inst{1} \and S.~Lautre\inst{2}} +% - Composez les noms dans l'ordre dans lequel ils apparaîtrons dans l'article +% - Utilisez la commande \inst{?} uniquement si les auteurs ont des affiliations +% différentes. + +\institute[Universités de Quelque Part et d'Ailleurs] % (facultatif mais généralement nécessaire) +{ + \inst{1}% + Département d'Informatique\\ + Université de Quelque Part + \and + \inst{2}% + Département de Philosophie Théorique\\ + Université d'Ailleurs} +% - Utilisez la commande \inst uniquement s'il y a plusieurs affectations +% - Faîtes quelque chose de simple, personne ne s'intéresse à votre adresse. + +\date[Version courte] % (facultatif) +{Date / Occasion} + +\subject{Exposé} +% Inséré uniquement dans la page d'information du fichier PDF. Peut être +% supprimé. + + + +% Si vous avez un fichier nommé "université-logo-nomfichier.xxx", où xxx +% est un format graphique accepté par latex ou pdflatex (comme par exemple .png), +% alors vous pouvez insérer votre logo ainsi : + +% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{le-logo}{université-logo-nomfichier} +% \logo{\pgfuseimage{le-logo}} + + + +% À supprimer si vous ne voulez pas que la table des matières apparaisse +% au début de chaque sous-section : + +\AtBeginSubsection[] { + \begin{frame}{Lignes directrices} + \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection] + \end{frame} +} + + +% Si vous souhaitez recouvrir vos transparents un à un, +% utilisez la commande suivante (pour plus d'info, voir la page 74 du manuel +% d'utilisation de Beamer (version 3.06) par Till Tantau) : + +%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->} + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame} + \titlepage +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Lignes directrices} + \tableofcontents + % Vous pouvez, si vous le souhaiter ajouter l'option [pausesections] +\end{frame} + + +% Puisqu'il s'agit d'un exemple-type pour un exposé d'ordre général, peu de choses +% peuvent être dites concernant sa structure. Cependant, la durée varie de 15 minutes +% à 45 minutes et le thème vous suggère de suivre les règles suivantes : + +% - Avoir exactement deux ou trois sections (autre que la table des matières). +% - Tout au plus trois sous-sections par section +% - Parlez approximativement entre 30 secondes et 2 minutes par transparent. Il +% devrait donc y avoir entre 15 et 30 transparents, tous ayant été commentés. + +\section{Introduction} + +\subsection[Court titre s-section]{Un très long titre de sous-section.} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.}{Les sous-titres sont facultatifs.} + % - Le titre doit résumer le transparent dans un langage compréhensible + % par tous ceux qui ne suivront rien de ce qu'il y a sur ce transparent. + + \begin{itemize} + \item Utilisez \texttt{itemize} à volonté. + \item Utilisez des phrases très courtes et de courtes expressions. + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent} + + Vous pouvez créer des recouvrements\dots + \begin{itemize} + \item en utilisant la commande \texttt{pause} : + \begin{itemize} + \item + Premier item. + \pause + \item + Second item. + \end{itemize} + \item + en utilisant les spécifications des recouvrements + \begin{itemize} + \item<3-> + Premier item. + \item<4-> + Second item. + \end{itemize} + \item + en utilisant en général la commande \texttt{uncover} : + \begin{itemize} + \uncover<5->{\item + Premier item.} + \uncover<6->{\item + Second item.} + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\subsection{Deuxième sous-section} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment super ! +\end{frame} + +\begin{frame}{Faîtes des titres qui informent.} + + {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment génial ! +\end{frame} + + + +\section*{Résumé} + +\begin{frame}{Résumé} + + % Faîtes un résumé *très court*. + \begin{itemize} + \item + Le \alert{premier message principal} de l'exposé en une ligne ou + deux. + \item + Le \alert{deuxième message principal} de l'exposé en une ligne ou + deux. + \item + Peut-être un \alert{troisième message}, mais pas plus que ça. + \end{itemize} + + % Les perspectives suivantes sont facultatives. + \vskip0pt plus.5fill + \begin{itemize} + \item + Perspectives + \begin{itemize} + \item + Problème non résolu. + \item + Autre problème non résolu. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a64b6e3ac4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +% $Header$ + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% Diese Datei enthält eine Lösungsvorlage für: + +% - Das Vorstellen des nächsten Sprechers. +% - Vortragslänge von ca. zwei Minuten. +% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschnörkelt/dekorativ. + + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under +% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified +% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a +% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another +% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and +% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright +% notice. + + +\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25] +% Oder was auch immer. + +\usetheme{Warsaw} +\setbeamertemplate{headline}{} +\setbeamertemplate{footline}{} +\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm} + +\usepackage[german]{babel} +% Oder was auch immer + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% Oder was auch immer + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen +% müssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile +% mit fontenc zu löschen. + + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame}{Name der/des Vortragenden}{Über unsere(n) nächste(n) Vortragende(n)} + + \begin{itemize} + \item + Derzeitige Stellung(en) von Name der/des Vortragenden + + % Beispiele: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Professor für Mathematik, Universität Irgendwo. + \item + Juniorpartner bei Firma X. + \item + Sprecher der Organisation X / des Projekts X. + \end{itemize} + \item + Erfahrungen und Erfolge + % Optional. Sollte nur gebracht werden, wenn es angemessen + % erscheint, dem Vortragenden leicht zu schmeicheln; was + % beispielsweise bei eingeladenen Vortragenden der Fall ist. + % Die Unterpunkte sollten den Sprecher interessant und kompetent + % erscheinen lassen. + + % Beispiele: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Falls passend, akademischer Grad + \item + Derzeitige und/oder vorherige Stellungen, eventuell mit Daten + \item + Publikationen (eventuell lediglich die Anzahl) + \item + Auszeichnungen, Preise + \end{itemize} + \item + In Bezug auf den heutigen Vortrag + % Optional. Sollte benutzt werden, um spezielle Erfahrungen / + % spezielles Wissen des Vortragenen speziell in Bezug auf den + % Vortrag aufzuzeigen -- falls diese Erfahrungen sich nicht + % bereits aus obigen Punkten ableiten lassen. + + % Beispiele: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Expertin/Experte, die/der seit X Monaten/Jahren in dem + Gebiet/Projekt arbeitet. + \item + Wird ihre/seine Forschung / die Forschung der Gruppe/Firma vorstellen. + \item + Wird einen Projektbericht/Projektstatus vorstellen. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..35a654a3847 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +% $Header$ + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% This file is a solution template for: + +% - Introducing another speaker. +% - Talk length is about 2min. +% - Style is ornate. + + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under +% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified +% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a +% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another +% package/program, the author grants the extra permission to freely +% copy and modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this +% copyright notice. + + +\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25] +% or whatever + +\usetheme{Warsaw} +\setbeamertemplate{headline}{} +\setbeamertemplate{footline}{} +\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm} + +\usepackage[english]{babel} +% or whatever + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% or whatever + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1 +% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc. + + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame}{Speaker's Name}{About Our Next Speaker} + + \begin{itemize} + \item + Current affiliation of Speaker's Name + + % Examples: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Professor of mathematics, University of Wherever. + \item + Junior partner at company X. + \item + Speaker for organization/project X. + \end{itemize} + \item + Experience and achievements + % Optional. Use this if it is appropriate to slightly flatter the + % speaker, for example if the speaker has been invited. + % Using subitems, list things that make the speaker look + % interesting and competent. + + % Examples: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Academic degree, but only if appropriate + \item + Current and/or previous positions, possibly with dates + \item + Publications (possibly just number of publications) + \item + Awards, prizes + \end{itemize} + \item + Concerning today's talk + % Optional. Use this to point out specific experiences/knowledge + % of the speaker that are important for the talk and that do not + % follow from the above. + + % Examples: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Expert who has worked in the field/project for X month/years. + \item + Will present his/her/group's/company's research on the subject. + \item + Will summarize project report or current project status. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d7b3969d12d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa + +\documentclass{beamer} + +% Ce fichier est un exemple-type pour : + +% - Introduire un autre conférencier +% - une durée de parole d'approximativement 2 minutes +% - un style ornemental + + + +% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . +% +% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa +% +% En principe, ce fichier peut être redistribué et/ou modifié conformément +% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2. +% +% Cependant, ce fichier est supposé comme étant un "exemple-type" qui peut être modifié +% selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu' +% "exemple-type" et non spécifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un +% package ou programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier librement et +% de modifier ce fichier et même d'effacer ce message de copyright. + + +\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical +shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25] +% ou autre + +\usetheme{Warsaw} +\setbeamertemplate{headline}{} \setbeamertemplate{footline}{} +\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm} + +\usepackage[french]{babel} +% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel} + +\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +% or autre + +\usepackage{times} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent être assortis. Si T1 +% ne paraît pas très esthétique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc. + + + +\begin{document} + +\begin{frame}{Nom du conférencier}{À propos du conférencier suivant} + + \begin{itemize} + \item + Affiliation actuelle du conférencier + + % Exemples: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Professeur de Mathématiques, Université de Quelque Part. + \item + Partenaire Junior de la Compagnie X + \item + Conférencier pour l'organisation/le projet X. + \end{itemize} + \item + Expérience et réalisation + % Facultatif. Utilisez ceci s'il est approprié de flatté légèrement le + % conférencier ; par exemple, s'il s'agit d'un invité. + % En utilisant des sous-item, la liste des choses faites par le conférencier + % paraît intéressante et suffisante. + + % Exemples: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Diplôme d'Académie, mais uniquement si c'est approprié + \item + Positions actuelles ou futures, éventuellement avec les dates + \item + Publications (éventuellement juste le nombre de publications) + \item + Récompenses, prix + \end{itemize} + \item + Concernant le sujet d'aujourd'hui + % Facultatif. Il est important pour l'exposé d'utiliser ce point en dehors des toutes + % expériences/connaissances spécifiques du conférencier et de ne pas poursuivre ce qui + % a été indiqué plus haut. + + % Exemples: + \begin{itemize} + \item + Expert qui a travaillé sur le projet durant X mois/année. + \item + Va présenter les recherches de son groupe/sa compagnie sur le + sujet. + \item + Va résumer le rapport du projet ou le statut actuel du projet. + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{frame} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a64b6e3ac4c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ -% $Header$ - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% Diese Datei enthält eine Lösungsvorlage für: - -% - Das Vorstellen des nächsten Sprechers. -% - Vortragslänge von ca. zwei Minuten. -% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschnörkelt/dekorativ. - - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under -% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified -% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a -% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another -% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and -% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright -% notice. - - -\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25] -% Oder was auch immer. - -\usetheme{Warsaw} -\setbeamertemplate{headline}{} -\setbeamertemplate{footline}{} -\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm} - -\usepackage[german]{babel} -% Oder was auch immer - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% Oder was auch immer - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen -% müssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile -% mit fontenc zu löschen. - - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame}{Name der/des Vortragenden}{Über unsere(n) nächste(n) Vortragende(n)} - - \begin{itemize} - \item - Derzeitige Stellung(en) von Name der/des Vortragenden - - % Beispiele: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Professor für Mathematik, Universität Irgendwo. - \item - Juniorpartner bei Firma X. - \item - Sprecher der Organisation X / des Projekts X. - \end{itemize} - \item - Erfahrungen und Erfolge - % Optional. Sollte nur gebracht werden, wenn es angemessen - % erscheint, dem Vortragenden leicht zu schmeicheln; was - % beispielsweise bei eingeladenen Vortragenden der Fall ist. - % Die Unterpunkte sollten den Sprecher interessant und kompetent - % erscheinen lassen. - - % Beispiele: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Falls passend, akademischer Grad - \item - Derzeitige und/oder vorherige Stellungen, eventuell mit Daten - \item - Publikationen (eventuell lediglich die Anzahl) - \item - Auszeichnungen, Preise - \end{itemize} - \item - In Bezug auf den heutigen Vortrag - % Optional. Sollte benutzt werden, um spezielle Erfahrungen / - % spezielles Wissen des Vortragenen speziell in Bezug auf den - % Vortrag aufzuzeigen -- falls diese Erfahrungen sich nicht - % bereits aus obigen Punkten ableiten lassen. - - % Beispiele: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Expertin/Experte, die/der seit X Monaten/Jahren in dem - Gebiet/Projekt arbeitet. - \item - Wird ihre/seine Forschung / die Forschung der Gruppe/Firma vorstellen. - \item - Wird einen Projektbericht/Projektstatus vorstellen. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 35a654a3847..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ -% $Header$ - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% This file is a solution template for: - -% - Introducing another speaker. -% - Talk length is about 2min. -% - Style is ornate. - - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under -% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified -% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a -% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another -% package/program, the author grants the extra permission to freely -% copy and modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this -% copyright notice. - - -\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25] -% or whatever - -\usetheme{Warsaw} -\setbeamertemplate{headline}{} -\setbeamertemplate{footline}{} -\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm} - -\usepackage[english]{babel} -% or whatever - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% or whatever - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1 -% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc. - - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame}{Speaker's Name}{About Our Next Speaker} - - \begin{itemize} - \item - Current affiliation of Speaker's Name - - % Examples: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Professor of mathematics, University of Wherever. - \item - Junior partner at company X. - \item - Speaker for organization/project X. - \end{itemize} - \item - Experience and achievements - % Optional. Use this if it is appropriate to slightly flatter the - % speaker, for example if the speaker has been invited. - % Using subitems, list things that make the speaker look - % interesting and competent. - - % Examples: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Academic degree, but only if appropriate - \item - Current and/or previous positions, possibly with dates - \item - Publications (possibly just number of publications) - \item - Awards, prizes - \end{itemize} - \item - Concerning today's talk - % Optional. Use this to point out specific experiences/knowledge - % of the speaker that are important for the talk and that do not - % follow from the above. - - % Examples: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Expert who has worked in the field/project for X month/years. - \item - Will present his/her/group's/company's research on the subject. - \item - Will summarize project report or current project status. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\end{document} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex deleted file mode 100644 index d7b3969d12d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ -% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa - -\documentclass{beamer} - -% Ce fichier est un exemple-type pour : - -% - Introduire un autre conférencier -% - une durée de parole d'approximativement 2 minutes -% - un style ornemental - - - -% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau . -% -% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa -% -% En principe, ce fichier peut être redistribué et/ou modifié conformément -% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2. -% -% Cependant, ce fichier est supposé comme étant un "exemple-type" qui peut être modifié -% selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu' -% "exemple-type" et non spécifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un -% package ou programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier librement et -% de modifier ce fichier et même d'effacer ce message de copyright. - - -\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical -shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25] -% ou autre - -\usetheme{Warsaw} -\setbeamertemplate{headline}{} \setbeamertemplate{footline}{} -\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm} - -\usepackage[french]{babel} -% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel} - -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% or autre - -\usepackage{times} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent être assortis. Si T1 -% ne paraît pas très esthétique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc. - - - -\begin{document} - -\begin{frame}{Nom du conférencier}{À propos du conférencier suivant} - - \begin{itemize} - \item - Affiliation actuelle du conférencier - - % Exemples: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Professeur de Mathématiques, Université de Quelque Part. - \item - Partenaire Junior de la Compagnie X - \item - Conférencier pour l'organisation/le projet X. - \end{itemize} - \item - Expérience et réalisation - % Facultatif. Utilisez ceci s'il est approprié de flatté légèrement le - % conférencier ; par exemple, s'il s'agit d'un invité. - % En utilisant des sous-item, la liste des choses faites par le conférencier - % paraît intéressante et suffisante. - - % Exemples: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Diplôme d'Académie, mais uniquement si c'est approprié - \item - Positions actuelles ou futures, éventuellement avec les dates - \item - Publications (éventuellement juste le nombre de publications) - \item - Récompenses, prix - \end{itemize} - \item - Concernant le sujet d'aujourd'hui - % Facultatif. Il est important pour l'exposé d'utiliser ce point en dehors des toutes - % expériences/connaissances spécifiques du conférencier et de ne pas poursuivre ce qui - % a été indiqué plus haut. - - % Exemples: - \begin{itemize} - \item - Expert qui a travaillé sur le projet durant X mois/année. - \item - Va présenter les recherches de son groupe/sa compagnie sur le - sujet. - \item - Va résumer le rapport du projet ou le statut actuel du projet. - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{frame} - -\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls index fd632ab15cb..f3564e183cd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ % See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. \ProvidesClass{beamer} - [2019/07/23 v3.56 A class for typesetting presentations] + [2019/09/29 v3.57 A class for typesetting presentations] % Setup modes and check for article option % Also loads packages required by both beamer and beamerarticle diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty index 8889a66dac4..2972dd7fb02 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ % See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details. \ProvidesPackage{beamerarticle} - [2019/07/23 v3.56 beamer input in article mode] + [2019/09/29 v3.57 beamer input in article mode] % Setup modes and check for article option % Also loads packages required by both beamer and beamerarticle diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty index 099df8c845b..6818db39bdf 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty @@ -184,6 +184,7 @@ \ifdim\beamer@colbox@colseps>\z@\vskip\beamer@colbox@colseps\fi% \fi% \egroup\color@endgroup\egroup% + \wd\beamer@tempbox=\beamer@colbox@wd% \ifx\beamer@colbox@ht\@empty\else\ht\beamer@tempbox=\beamer@colbox@ht\fi% \ifx\beamer@colbox@dp\@empty\else\dp\beamer@tempbox=\beamer@colbox@dp\fi% \ifbeamer@colbox@rounded% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty index 182a5f88738..adf021aae70 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ \begin{actionenv}#2% \def\insertblocktitle{#1}% \par% - \mode{%\usebeamerfont{block}% + \only{%\usebeamerfont{block}% \setbeamercolor{local structure}{parent=alerted text}}% \usebeamertemplate{block alerted begin}} {\par% @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ \begin{actionenv}#2% \def\insertblocktitle{#1}% \par% - \mode{%\usebeamerfont{block}% + \only{%\usebeamerfont{block}% \setbeamercolor{local structure}{parent=example text}}% \usebeamertemplate{block example begin}} {\par% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty index c8aff5287ba..ad003c9aef7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ \usebeamerfont{author in head/foot}\insertshortauthor \end{beamercolorbox}% \begin{beamercolorbox}[wd=.5\paperwidth,ht=2.5ex,dp=1.125ex,leftskip=.3cm,rightskip=.3cm plus1fil]{title in head/foot}% - \usebeamerfont{title in head/foot}\insertshorttitle\hfill\usebeamercolor[fg]{page number in head/foot}\usebeamerfont{page number in head/foot}\usebeamertemplate{page number in head/foot} + \usebeamerfont{title in head/foot}\insertshorttitle\nobreak\hfill\usebeamercolor[fg]{page number in head/foot}\usebeamerfont{page number in head/foot}\usebeamertemplate{page number in head/foot} \end{beamercolorbox}}% \vskip0pt% } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty index 7853b36d704..b10e4325ab9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ \mode -\if@plnewitem +\if@plnewenum \def\enumerate{% \ifnum \@enumdepth >\tw@ \@toodeep @@ -42,6 +42,45 @@ \raggedright% \beamer@firstlineitemizeunskip% } +\fi +\def\compactenum{% + \ifnum \@enumdepth >\tw@ + \@toodeep + \else + \advance\@enumdepth \@ne + \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% + \advance\@itemdepth \@ne% + \fi + \def\@enum@widestlabel{7}% + \beamer@computepref\@enumdepth% + \expandafter\edef\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname{\noexpand\usebeamertemplate{enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix item}}% + \@ifnextchar[{\beamer@@cenum@}{\beamer@compactenum@}} +\def\beamer@@cenum@[{\@ifnextchar<{\beamer@cenumdefault[}{\beamer@@@cenum@[}} +\def\beamer@cenumdefault[#1]{\def\beamer@defaultospec{#1}% + \@ifnextchar[{\beamer@@@cenum@}{\beamer@compactenum@}} +\def\beamer@@@cenum@[#1]{\@enumlabel@{\beamer@compactenum@}[[#1]} % Here a token is gobbled in paralist package +\def\beamer@compactenum@{% + \beamer@computepref\@itemdepth% + \usebeamerfont{itemize/enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix body}% + \usebeamercolor[fg]{itemize/enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix body}% + \@adjust@enum@labelwidth + \expandafter\list\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname{% + \usecounter{\@enumctr}% + \parsep\plparsep + \itemsep\plitemsep + \topsep\pltopsep + \partopsep\plpartopsep + \labelwidth + \csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@listdepth\endcsname + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep + \let\makelabel\enumlabel}% + \beamer@cramped% + \raggedright% + \beamer@firstlineitemizeunskip% +} +\def\endcompactenum{\ifhmode\par\fi\endlist} + +\if@plnewitem \def\itemize{% \ifnum \@itemdepth >\tw@ \@toodeep @@ -71,6 +110,39 @@ \beamer@firstlineitemizeunskip% } \fi +\def\compactitem{% + \ifnum \@itemdepth >\tw@ + \@toodeep + \else + \advance\@itemdepth\@ne + \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% + \fi + \beamer@computepref\@itemdepth% + \expandafter\edef\csname\@itemitem\endcsname{\noexpand\usebeamertemplate{itemize \beameritemnestingprefix item}}% + \@ifnextchar[{\beamer@@citem@}{\beamer@compactitem@}}% +\def\beamer@@citem@[{\@ifnextchar<{\beamer@citemdefault[}{\beamer@@@citem@[}} +\def\beamer@citemdefault[#1]{\def\beamer@defaultospec{#1}% + \@ifnextchar[{\beamer@@@citem@}{\beamer@compactitem@}} +\def\beamer@@@citem@[#1]{\@itemlabel@{\beamer@compactitem@}[#1]} +\def\beamer@compactitem@{% + \usebeamerfont{itemize/enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix body}% + \usebeamercolor[fg]{itemize/enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix body}% + \@adjust@item@labelwidth + \expandafter\list\csname\@itemitem\endcsname{% + \parsep\plparsep + \itemsep\plitemsep + \topsep\pltopsep + \partopsep\plpartopsep + \labelwidth + \csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@listdepth\endcsname + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep + \let\makelabel\itemlabel}% + \beamer@cramped% + \raggedright% + \beamer@firstlineitemizeunskip% +} +\def\endcompactitem{\ifhmode\par\fi\endlist} + \if@plflushright \def\enumlabel#1{{\usebeamerfont*{enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix item}% \usebeamercolor[fg]{enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix item}\hss#1}} -- cgit v1.2.3